Lucent Technologies MERLIN LEGEND Release 6.1 Feature Reference
  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Lucent Technologies Manuals
  4. Conference System
  5. MERLIN LEGEND Release 6.1
  6. Feature reference

Lucent Technologies MERLIN LEGEND Release 6.1 Feature Reference

Release 6.1
Hide thumbs Also See for MERLIN LEGEND Release 6.1:
1
2
Table Of Contents
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
975
976
977
978
979
980
981
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
990
Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

Download this manual See also: Installation Manual
MERLIN LEGEND
Communications System
Release 6.1
Feature Reference
®
555-661-110
Comcode 108289000
Issue 1
August 1998

Advertisement

Table of Contents
loading
Need help?

Need help?

Do you have a question about the MERLIN LEGEND Release 6.1 and is the answer not in the manual?

Questions and answers

Subscribe to Our Youtube Channel

Related Manuals for Lucent Technologies MERLIN LEGEND Release 6.1

Summary of Contents for Lucent Technologies MERLIN LEGEND Release 6.1

  • Page 1 MERLIN LEGEND ® Communications System Release 6.1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 Comcode 108289000 Issue 1 August 1998...
  • Page 2 Lucent Technologies does not warrant that this product is immune from or will prevent unauthorized use of common-carrier telecommunication services or facilities accessed through or connected to it. Lucent Technologies will not be responsible for any charges that result from such unau- thorized use.

  • Page 3: Table Of Contents

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Contents Page iii Contents IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS New Features and Enhancements Release 6.1 Enhancements (August 1998) Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 6.0 Enhancements (February 1998) Release 5.0 Enhancements (June 1997) xxix Release 4.2 Enhancements (June 1997) xxxiv...
  • Page 4 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Contents Page iv Features Index of Feature Names Index to Features by Activity Account Code Entry/Forced Account Code Entry Alarm Alarm Clock Allowed/Disallowed Lists Authorization Code Auto Answer All Auto Answer Intercom Auto Dial Automatic Line Selection and...
  • Page 5 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Contents Page v Forward and Follow Me Group Calling Headset Options Hold HotLine Inside Dial Tone Inspect Integrated Administration Labeling Language Choice Last Number Dial Line Request Messaging Microphone Disable Multi-Function Module...
  • Page 6 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Contents Page vi System Access/Intercom Buttons System Renumbering Tandem Switching Timer Toll Type Touch-Tone or Rotary Signaling Transfer Uniform Dial Plan Features Voice Announce to Busy Volume Customer Support Information Support Telephone Number Federal Communications Commission...
  • Page 7 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Contents Page vii Features and Planning Forms System Features General Feature Use and Telephone Programming General Feature Use Information Telephone and Operator Features Telephone Programming D-13 System Programming Menu Hierarchy Sample Reports System Information Report Dial Plan Report...
  • Page 8 MLX Display Telephones Applications Organization of Descriptions System Support for Applications Supported Printers PassageWay Direct Connection Solution Voice Messaging Systems MERLIN MAIL and MERLIN LEGEND Mail I-11 Messaging 2000 I-19 Lucent Technologies Attendant I-20 MERLIN LEGEND Enhanced Service Center I-24...
  • Page 9 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Contents Page ix Call Accounting System I-25 Call Accounting Terminal I-28 Call Management System I-32 MERLIN LEGEND Reporter I-35 System Programming and Maintenance I-41 Integrated Solution II I-43 Integrated Solution III I-49...
  • Page 10 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Figures Page xi Figures Features ARS Table Selection ARS Route Selection within a Table Subpattern Selection Full Centrex Service Limited Centrex Service Group Coverage Only or All Individual Coverage Receivers Unavailable (Release 4.1 and Later Systems Only) Group Coverage Only or All Individual Coverage...
  • Page 11 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Figures Page xii System Programming/Switch Admin Form Screen System Programming/Switch Admin Menu Screen Automated Attendant Screen Automated Attendant: Immediate Call-Handling Screen Automated Attendant: Delayed Call-Handling Screen391 Automated Attendant: Night Service Screen Call Answer Screen Fax Response Screen Information Service Screen...
  • Page 12 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Figures Page xiii Analog Multiline Telephone Button Diagram (Key and Behind Switch Modes) Applications Call Accounting Terminal Basic I-29 Call Accounting Terminal Plus I-30 MERLIN PFC Telephone I-60...

  • Page 13: Merlin Legend Communications System Release 6.1 Issue

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Figures Page xiv...
  • Page 14 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Tables Page xv Tables Features Special Characters for Outside Auto Dial Factory-Set Automatic Line Selection Sequence Facility Restriction Levels Ring Delays Affecting Coverage Ring Timing Options Ringing on Individual Coverage (Receiver) Buttons Calls Eligible and Calls Ineligible for Coverage Group Coverage Call Delivery Rules (Release 4.1 and Later Systems)
  • Page 15 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Tables Page xvi Factory-Set Posted Messages and Their Codes Message-Waiting Display Identifiers Posted Messages Call Types and Transfer Audible Types of Pickup Line Compensation Settings Sample PRI Dial-Plan Routing Table Sample Network Selection Table Sample Special Services Selection Table Sample Call-by-Call Services Table...
  • Page 16 Applications Application Capacities and Mode s of Operation Applications Printers Ports Required for MERLIN MAIL and MERLIN LEGEND Mail Voice Messaging Systems I-19 Lucent Technologies Attendants Required I-23 Programming Compatibility I-43 Voice Channels Required: IS II I-45 Voice Channels Required: IS III...
  • Page 17 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Tables Page xviii...

  • Page 18: August

    Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone wiring has been disconnected at the network interface. Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines. Use only Lucent Technologies-manufactured MERLIN LEGEND Communications System circuit modules, carrier assemblies, and power units in the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System control unit.

  • Page 19: Save These Instructions

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS Page xx Do not attach the power supply cord to building surfaces. Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord. Do not locate this product where the cord will be abused by persons walking on it.

  • Page 20: New Features And Enhancements

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 New Features and Enhancements Release 6.1 Enhancements (August 1998) Page xxi New Features and Enhancements Release 6.1 Enhancements (August 1998) Release 6.1 includes all Release 6.0 functionality, plus the enhancements listed below.
  • Page 21 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 New Features and Enhancements Release 6.1 Enhancements (August 1998) Page xxii Centralized Voice Messaging One or more MERLIN LEGEND systems (Release 6.1 or later) can share the voice messaging system (VMS) of another MERLIN LEGEND system, provided the systems are directly connected to the system with the VMS.
  • Page 22 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 New Features and Enhancements Release 6.1 Enhancements (August 1998) Page xxiii Calling group overflow coverage. Calling group overflow coverage can be provided by a centralized VMS, a non-local calling group, a QCC queue, a DLC, or any individual extension on the remote system.
  • Page 23 PRI Switch Type Test A new maintenance test, the PRI Switch Type Test, has been created to allow Lucent Technologies technicians or authorized dealers to automatically determine if each end of the PRI tandem trunks has been programmed correctly. Service Observing Service Observing allows one extension to listen in on (observe) a call at another extension.

  • Page 24: Prior Releases: Features And Enhancements

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 6.0 Enhancements (February 1998) Page xxv Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 6.0 Enhancements (February 1998) Release 6.0 includes all Release 5.0 functionality, plus the enhancements listed below.
  • Page 25 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 6.0 Enhancements (February 1998) Page xxvi associates with routes, Facility Restriction Levels (FRLs), digit absorption, and digit prepending. This allows ARS-like routing of non-local dial plan calls.
  • Page 26 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 6.0 Enhancements (February 1998) Page xxvii Voice Mail and Auto Attendant. Networked systems should have their own local voice mail and/or auto attendant applications as well as their own external alerts and Music On Hold sources.
  • Page 27 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 6.0 Enhancements (February 1998) Page xxviii Prompt-Based Overflow System managers can activate the Prompt-Based Overflow option. This option allows callers waiting in queue and listening to a delay announcement to press the # key in order to reach the overflow receiver for the group, which may be the QCC queue or another calling group (including a calling group assigned for a voice mail system).

  • Page 28: Release 5.0 Enhancements (June 1997)

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System to a LAN server running Novell ® NetWare software allows Lucent Technologies-certified telephony applications to control and monitor MLX and analog multiline telephone (BIS only) operations. The physical connection for the CTI link is an MLX port on a 008 MLX or 408 MLX module on the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System control unit and ISDN link interface card plugged into the customer’s server.
  • Page 29 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 5.0 Enhancements (June 1997) Page xxx Hanging up calls Hold and retrieving a call on hold at the user’s extension NOTE: Transfer and 3-way conference, when handled through a CTI link application, provide the original caller’s calling number information or other information to the transfer receiver or new conference...
  • Page 30 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 5.0 Enhancements (June 1997) Page xxxi the DLC is non-monitored, screen pops can occur after the DLC releases the call. 3. Calls transferred from Cover buttons on non-monitored DLCs do not initiate screen pop at the destination extension.
  • Page 31 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 5.0 Enhancements (June 1997) Page xxxii Most Idle Hunt Type In addition to the Circular (factory setting) and Linear hunt types supported in earlier releases, a third hunt type distributes calling group calls in an order based on which agent has waited the longest since transferring or hanging up on an incoming calling group call.
  • Page 32 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 5.0 Enhancements (June 1997) Page xxxiii Calls-in-Queue Alarm button indicates the severity of the alarm conditions in the following ways: If the number of waiting calls is less than the value programmed for Threshold 1 or drops below that level, the LED is unlit.

  • Page 33: Release 4.2 Enhancements (June 1997)

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 4.2 Enhancements (June 1997) Page xxxiv Release 4.2 Enhancements (June 1997) Release 4.2 includes all Release 4.1 functionality, plus the enhancements listed below.
  • Page 34 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 4.2 Enhancements (June 1997) Page xxxv — DMS tie trunk service to provide private exchange call rating for calls placed on a dedicated central office facility between the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System and another communications system (such as another MERLIN LEGEND Communications System) Improvements to Station Message Detail...
  • Page 35 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 4.2 Enhancements (June 1997) Page xxxvi MERLIN LEGEND Reporter MERLIN LEGEND Reporter provides basic call accounting system reports for all incoming calls to Auto Login or Auto Logout type calling groups. MERLIN LEGEND Reporter assists in determining the effectiveness of calling group agents, assessing the level of service provided to callers, and ascertaining whether adequate incoming phone lines and agents are available to handle peak-...

  • Page 36: Release 4.1 Enhancements (June 1997)

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 4.1 Enhancements (June 1997) Page xxxvii Release 4.1 Enhancements (June 1997) Release 4.1 includes all Release 4.0 functionality, plus the enhancements listed below.
  • Page 37 Network-1 Basic Rate Interface) Provisioning Test Tool is enhanced to include testing for BRI facilities that are part of Multiline Hunt Groups (MLHGs). The NI-1 BRI Provisioning Test Tool is used by Lucent Technologies maintenance personnel on MERLIN LEGEND Communications Systems that include a 800 NI-BRI module.

  • Page 38: Release 4.0 Enhancements (March 1996)

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 4.0 Enhancements (March 1996) Page xxxix Release 4.0 Enhancements (March 1996) Release 4.0 includes all Release 3.1 functionality, plus the enhancements listed below.

  • Page 39: (Hybrid/Pbx Mode

    Page xl Support for 2B Data Applications A Lucent Technologies-certified group and desktop video application can use two B-channels to make video/data calls when connected to a single MLX extension jack programmed for 2B data. The 2B data devices must be equipped with ISDN-BRI interfaces.
  • Page 40 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 4.0 Enhancements (March 1996) Page xli Time-Based Option for Overflow on Calling Group Release 4.0 has added a time limit for calls in queue in addition to the previous number of calls limit.

  • Page 41: Release 3.1 Enhancements (March 1996)

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 3.1 Enhancements (March 1996) Page xlii Release 3.1 Enhancements (March 1996) Release 3.1 includes all Release 3.0 functionality, plus the enhancements listed below.
  • Page 42 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 3.1 Enhancements (March 1996) Page xliii Disallowed List Including Numbers Often Associated with Toll Fraud A factory-set Disallowed List 7 contains default entries, which are numbers frequently associated with toll fraud.
  • Page 43 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Prior Releases: Features and Enhancements Release 3.1 Enhancements (March 1996) Page xliv SECURITYlALERT: The enhancements in Release 3.1 help increase the security of the MERLIN LEGEND System. To fully utilize these security enhancements, be sure to read and understand the information in these upgrade notes and in the relevant system guides.

  • Page 44: About This Book

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 About This Book Intended Audience Page xlv About This Book The MERLIN LEGEND Communications System is an advanced digital switching system that integrates voice and data communications features. Voice features include traditional telephone features, such as Transfer and Hold, and advanced features, such as Group Coverage, Direct Voice Mail, and Tandem Switching.
  • Page 45 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 About This Book How to Use This Book Page xlvi “At a Glance,” a boxed table at the beginning of each feature description, summarizes, as applicable, the following aspects of the feature or feature group: Users Affected.

  • Page 46: Terms And Conventions Used

    Terms and Conventions Used Page xlvii In the USA only, Lucent Technologies provides a toll-free customer Helpline 24 hours a day. Call the Helpline at 1 800 628-2888 (consultation charges may apply), or call your Lucent Technologies representative, if you need assistance when installing, programming, or using your system.
  • Page 47 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 About This Book Security Page xlviii Typographical Conventions Certain type fonts and styles act as visual cues to help you rapidly understand the information presented: Example Purpose It is very important that you follow these Italics indicate emphasis.

  • Page 48: Feature Reference

    In addition to this book, the documents listed below are part of the documentation set. These documents can be ordered by calling the Lucent Technologies Fulfillment Center at 1 800 457-1235 from within the continental U.S. or 1 317 322 6791 outside the U.S.
  • Page 49 If the feedback form is missing, write directly to: Documentation Manager Lucent Technologies 211 Mount Airy Road, Room 2W226 Basking Ridge, NJ 07920...

  • Page 50: Features

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Page 1 Features This book provides both summary and detailed information about the features of the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System. For each feature, the following types of information are provided, as applicable: At a Glance.

  • Page 51: Index Of Feature Names

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Index of Feature Names Page 2 Index of Feature Names Feature Name 2B Data Digital Data Calls 200). See also Data/Video Reference. Administration Programming 535). See also System Programming.
  • Page 52 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Index of Feature Names Page 3 Feature Name Automatic Route Selection (ARS) over private Automatic Route Selection (p. 68) networks Tandem Switching 671). See also Network Reference . Autoqueuing Callback 103), Remote Access...
  • Page 53 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Index of Feature Names Page 4 Feature Name Call Management System (CMS) Extension Status 280), Appendix I (p. I–32) Camp-On Camp-On (p. 124) Cancel Delivered Message Messaging (p.
  • Page 54 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Index of Feature Names Page 5 Feature Name Dial Plan: Non-local Uniform Dial Plan (UDP) Features 710). See also Network Reference . Dialed number Display (p. 247) Digital Data Ports Digital Data Calls 200).
  • Page 55 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Index of Feature Names Page 6 Feature Name Extension Status Extension Status 280), Group Calling (p. 312) ExpressRoute 1000™ ISDN Terminal Adapter Digital Data Calls 200), Appendix I I–73).
  • Page 56 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Index of Feature Names Page 7 Feature Name Handset Mute Headset Options (p. 343) Headset Auto Answer Headset Options (p. 343) Headset Disconnect Headset Options (p. 343) Headset/Handset Mute Headset Options (p.
  • Page 57 LS-ID Delay option Caller ID (p. 111) ® Lucent Technologies Attendant Integrated Administration 367), Appendix I (p. I–20) ® Lucent Technologies Fax Attendant Integrated Administration 367), Appendix I (p. 49) Maintenance Alarm Alarm (p. 32) Maintenance Busy Automatic Maintenance Busy (p.
  • Page 58 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Index of Feature Names Page 9 Feature Name Menu-based feature activation Display (p. 247) Menu-based station programming Programming (p. 535) MERLIN II System Display Console Direct-Line Console 208), Direct Station Selector (p.
  • Page 59 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Index of Feature Names Page 10 Feature Name On- or off-hook queuing Callback (p. 103) One-Touch Hold Transfer (p. 693) One-Touch Transfer Transfer (p. 693) Operator Automatic Hold Hold (p.
  • Page 60 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Index of Feature Names Page 11 Feature Name Primary Coverage Coverage (p. 152) Primary Rate Interface (PRI) Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 489). See also Data/Video Reference . Prime line Centrex Operation (p.
  • Page 61 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Index of Feature Names Page 12 Feature Name Routing by dial plan Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 (p. 489) SA buttons System Access/Intercom Buttons (p. 648) Saved Number Dial Saved Number Dial (p.
  • Page 62 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Index of Feature Names Page 13 Feature Name Switched Loop Console Queued Call Console (p. 543) Switch Identifiers for non-local networked Tandem Switching 671). See also systems Network Reference.
  • Page 63 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Index of Feature Names Page 14 Feature Name UDP features Uniform Dial Plan (UDP) Features (p. 710) Unrestricted Restriction Calling Restrictions (p. 117) Videoconferencing Digital Data Calls 200), Appendix I I–65).

  • Page 64: Index To Features By Activity

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Index to Features by Activity Page 15 Index to Features by Activity The index in this section lists system features according to the activities that people typically perform. Operator features are not covered exhaustively here because they are described in detail in the entries: “Direct-Line Console”...
  • Page 65 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Index to Features by Activity Page 16 And seeing who is calling you from another extension Display phones Display (p. 247) And seeing who is calling you from an extension on a MLX display Display (p.
  • Page 66 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Index to Features by Activity Page 17 Basic Calling and Answering Feature Name Answering calls (continued) Using a Hands-Free Unit, without lifting the handset Analog Auto Answer Intercom (p.
  • Page 67 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Index to Features by Activity Page 18 Basic Calling and Answering Feature Name Dialing (continued) An Account Code, for billing to a project or client, Account Code Entry/Forced during or before a call Account Code Entry (p.
  • Page 68 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Index to Features by Activity Page 19 Basic Calling and Answering Feature Name Paging (continued) All the people at your company who have Paging (p. 453) speakerphones and are not QCC operators or at Pickup (p.
  • Page 69 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Index to Features by Activity Page 20 Covering Calls or Having Calls Covered Feature Name When you are covering calls As an operator DLC and QCC Direct-Line Console (p.
  • Page 70 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Index to Features by Activity Page 21 Calling Privileges and Restrictions Feature Name To prevent people from making calls To your extension All except Privacy (p. 532) operator Do Not Disturb (p.
  • Page 71 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Index to Features by Activity Page 22 Messaging Feature Name Leaving messages (continued) Post a specific message (such as, ) for All except Messaging (p. 415) (Posted co-workers who have display phones single-line...
  • Page 72 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Index to Features by Activity Page 23 System Manager Features Feature Name Customizing the system (continued) Modify the line buttons (SA or ICOM) available on a All except System Access/Intercom user’s telephone: change, add, or delete...
  • Page 73 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Index to Features by Activity Page 24 System Manager Features Feature Name Messages Change the posted messages that users can choose Labeling (p. 400) from Change the extension information that appears on Labeling (p.
  • Page 74 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Index to Features by Activity Page 25 System Manager Features Feature Name Troubleshooting (continued) Correct problems that users are having with the Recall/Timed Flash (p. 567) switchhook, Recall, or Flash button Join a caller and the extension he or she wants to Operator...
  • Page 75 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Index to Features by Activity Page 26 Understanding and Customizing Your Telephone Feature Name Give your phone its own distinctive ring Ringing Options (p. 593) Change the way your phone rings when you’re Ringing Options (p.

  • Page 76: Account Code Entry/Forced Account Code Entry

    System Programming Enter extensions required to use account codes before making an outside call: Hardware Printer for SMDR Reports, or PC and printer equipped with Lucent Technologies CAS software needed for Account Code Reports Maximum 16 characters (0–9, *) Factory Setting...
  • Page 77 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Account Code Entry/Forced Account Code Entry Page 28 Forced Account Code Entry, when activated for an extension, has the following effects: If you select an outside line on an SA button (by dialing a dial-out code) or on an ICOM button (by dialing the Idle Line Access code) without entering an account code, the call is blocked.
  • Page 78 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Account Code Entry/Forced Account Code Entry Page 29 Mode Differences Behind Switch Mode In Behind Switch mode, single-line telephones must be programmed through Idle Line Preference to select an SA or ICOM button when the user lifts the handset to make an outgoing call.
  • Page 79 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Account Code Entry/Forced Account Code Entry Page 30 Account Code Entry button; the green LED goes from flashing to on. Then select the outside line and proceed with the call. Single-Line Telephones By default, single-line telephones in Behind Switch mode cannot use Account Code Entry or Forced Account Code Entry.
  • Page 80 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Account Code Entry/Forced Account Code Entry Page 31 Directories An MLX-20L telephone user can program an account code as a listing in a Personal Directory. Enter the code from the display by activating Account Code Entry and choosing the directory entry with the code.

  • Page 81: Alarm

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Alarm Page 32 Alarm At a Glance Users Affected Operators Reports Affected Extension Information Mode Telephones System operator consoles only (QCC or DLC) Programming Code MLX Display Label System Programming Hardware Alert device (bell or strobe) for Maintenance Alert...
  • Page 82 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Alarm Page 33 Telephone Differences Alarm buttons can be programmed only on system operator consoles. Direct-Line Consoles The Alarm button is not a fixed feature and can be assigned to any available button on an analog or MLX DLC.

  • Page 83: Alarm Clock

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Alarm Clock Page 34 Alarm Clock At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators Reports Affected None Modes Telephones MLX display and analog multiline telephones MLX Display Label Description If you have a display phone, you can use it as an alarm clock and set it to beep at a particular time to remind you of an appointment, meeting, or other important...
  • Page 84 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Alarm Clock Page 35 Press the Exit button. A bell appears on the display next to the date. To Cancel the Alarm To cancel the alarm on an MLX display telephone, follow the procedure below: Press the Menu button.

  • Page 85: Allowed/Disallowed Lists

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Allowed/Disallowed Lists Page 36 Allowed/Disallowed Lists At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators, data users Reports Affected Access to Allowed Lists, Access to Disallowed Lists, Allowed Lists, Disallowed Lists, Remote Access (DISA) Information Modes...
  • Page 86 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Allowed/Disallowed Lists Page 37 Description Used in conjunction with calling restrictions (outward and toll), an Allowed List is a list of numbers that the caller is allowed to dial, despite restrictions. For example, an Allowed List assigned to an outward-restricted extension can allow calls to specific local numbers, such as 911 or toll numbers.
  • Page 87 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Allowed/Disallowed Lists Page 38 Star Codes and Allowed/Disallowed Lists In some instances, after a person dials a star code (a star digit followed by a 2- or 3-digit number), the central office provides a second dial tone as a prompt for the dialer to enter more digits.
  • Page 88 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Allowed/Disallowed Lists Page 39 Following are examples of specific results that cannot be achieved through programming the system: Disallow à when dialing a specific exchange. Disallow Ã...
  • Page 89 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Allowed/Disallowed Lists Page 40 Individual Allowed and Disallowed Lists are numbered 0 through 7. Within each list, there are 10 entries, numbered 0 through 9. The Pause character (entered by pressing the Hold button) can be used as a wild card character in Disallowed Lists, for example, to indicate that calls to a given exchange are restricted in every area code.
  • Page 90 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Allowed/Disallowed Lists Page 41 Forward and A user with a restricted extension cannot forward calls to a restricted Follow Me (outside or toll) number unless the number is on the Allowed List for that extension.
  • Page 91 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Allowed/Disallowed Lists Page 42 Tandem Switching In Release 6.0 and later systems (Hybrid/PBX mode only), when a system’s lines/trunks are used by callers on remote systems to make outside and intersystem calls, the system manager helps to prevent toll fraud by assigning a Disallowed List to the Remote Access default COR for tie and/or non-tie trunks.

  • Page 92: Authorization Code

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Authorization Code Page 43 Authorization Code At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, data users Reports Affected Extension Information, Authorization Code Information, SMDR Modes Telephones All (touch-tone telephones except QCC) Programming Code Feature Code MLX Display Label...
  • Page 93 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Authorization Code Page 44 programmed so that when no account code is entered, either the home extension number or the authorization code is recorded in the ACCOUNT field. The factory setting lists the home extension number in the ACCOUNT field.
  • Page 94 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Authorization Code Page 45 If you activate the feature while on hook, the feature selects an SA/ICOM button and turns on the speakerphone, if present. After you activate the feature, the green LED (if present) next to a programmed Authorization Code button starts to flash slowly to indicate that you may enter the code’s digits.
  • Page 95 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Authorization Code Page 46 There is no limit to the number of users who can use the same authorization code simultaneously. Authorization codes cannot contain a or begin with a .
  • Page 96 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Authorization Code Page 47 Feature Interactions Account Code Entry If an account code is not entered, the ACCOUNT field of the SMDR printout contains the authorization code or the home extension used to obtain restriction privileges.
  • Page 97 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Authorization Code Page 48 Remote Access A caller cannot enter an authorization code on a remote access call. Saved Number Dial For security, the authorization code is not saved by the Saved Number Dial feature.

  • Page 98: Auto Answer All

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Auto Answer All Page 49 Auto Answer All At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, DLC operators, data users Reports Affected Extension Information Modes Telephones Analog multiline Programming Code MLX Display Label (in centralized telephone programming)
  • Page 99 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Auto Answer All Page 50 Auto Answer All cannot be used with a Hands-Free Unit (HFU). Occasionally a second alert (or zip) tone may sound on incoming or intercom calls.
  • Page 100 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Auto Answer All Page 51 Group Calling Members in a calling group with analog multiline telephones can use Auto Answer All when answering machines are connected to their extensions. When the feature is activated, all incoming calls ringing on the calling group member’s extension—both calls for the calling group and calls to the member’s own extension—are answered automatically by the...

  • Page 101: Auto Answer Intercom

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Auto Answer Intercom Page 52 Auto Answer Intercom At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators Reports Affected Extension Information Modes Telephones Analog multiline Programming Code MLX Display Label (in centralized telephone programming) Hardware...
  • Page 102 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Auto Answer Intercom Page 53 Mode Differences When Auto Answer Intercom is activated in Hybrid/PBX mode and a call is received on an SA button, the HFU turns on, even if the button is programmed for Delay Ring or No Ring.

  • Page 103: Auto Dial

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Auto Dial Page 54 Auto Dial At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, DLC operators, data users Reports Affected Extension Information Modes Telephones All except QCC and single-line telephones Programming Codes Inside + ext.

  • Page 104: Special Characters For Outside Auto Dial

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Auto Dial Page 55 Only company extension numbers should be programmed on inside Auto Dial buttons. Account codes, long-distance company access codes, and outside telephone numbers should be programmed on outside Auto Dial buttons. If a user tries to program an incomplete extension number on an inside Auto Dial button, the system provides an error tone and the button remains as programmed.

  • Page 105: Hybrid/Pbx Mode

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Auto Dial Page 56 Mode Differences Hybrid/PBX Mode In Hybrid/PBX mode, the system automatically turns on the speakerphone and selects an SA button when you press an inside or outside Auto Dial button before lifting the handset.
  • Page 106 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Auto Dial Page 57 Single-Line Telephones Single-line telephone users cannot program Auto Dial buttons. Feature Interactions Account Code Entry You can program frequently used account code numbers onto outside Auto Dial buttons.
  • Page 107 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Auto Dial Page 58 Last Number Dial A number you dial by pressing a programmed outside Auto Dial button is saved for Last Number Dial as if you dialed it with the dialpad, but special characters do not work.
  • Page 108 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Auto Dial Page 59 Signal/Notify You cannot program a Signal button and an Auto Dial button for the same extension. Attempting to program both types of buttons for one extension causes the system to erase the button that has been programmed first.

  • Page 109: Automatic Line Selection And Ringing/Idle Line Preference

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Automatic Line Selection and Ringing/Idle Line Preference Page 60 Automatic Line Selection and Ringing/Idle Line Preference At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators, data users Reports Affected Extension Information Modes...

  • Page 110: Automatic Line Selection

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Automatic Line Selection and Ringing/Idle Line Preference Page 61 extension programming or centralized telephone programming, using the display or programming codes. When Ringing/Idle Line Preference is on for an extension, the system selects a line button automatically, as follows: Ringing Line Preference.

  • Page 111: Factory-Set Automatic Line Selection Sequence

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Automatic Line Selection and Ringing/Idle Line Preference Page 62 Table 2 shows the factory-set ALS sequence for each kind of telephone according to operating mode. When Ringing/Idle Line Preference is on, buttons are selected in the order shown.
  • Page 112 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Automatic Line Selection and Ringing/Idle Line Preference Page 63 When a user or system manager enters ALS programming, the system clears the current ALS sequence for the extension. If the person programming the extension exits without selecting any buttons, the extension has no ALS sequence.
  • Page 113 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Automatic Line Selection and Ringing/Idle Line Preference Page 64 Single-Line Telephones The ALS sequence for a single-line telephone can be changed only through centralized telephone programming. It cannot be changed by the telephone user. The ALS sequence for single-line telephones and other tip/ring equipment connected to 012 modules, 016 modules, 008 OPT modules, or Multi-Function Modules is factory-set to include only SA or ICOM buttons.
  • Page 114 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Automatic Line Selection and Ringing/Idle Line Preference Page 65 System Access/ SA (including Shared SA) or ICOM buttons can be programmed in an Intercom Buttons ALS sequence. Different button types (personal line, Pool, ICOM, SA, or Shared SA buttons) should not be interleaved in an ALS sequence.

  • Page 115: Automatic Maintenance Busy

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Automatic Maintenance Busy Page 66 Automatic Maintenance Busy At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators, data users Reports Affected System Information ( Mode Hybrid/PBX System Programming Description When Automatic Maintenance Busy is enabled, a malfunctioning loop-start, ground-start, or tie line/trunk is automatically put in a maintenance-busy state,...

  • Page 116: Key And Behind Switch Modes

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Automatic Maintenance Busy Page 67 DID trunks (Hybrid/PBX mode only) are not affected by Automatic Maintenance Busy because these trunks can only receive calls and are not pooled. 100D (DS1) modules configured as ground-start, loop-start, or tie lines/trunks are monitored and maintained by Automatic Maintenance Busy.

  • Page 117: Automatic Route Selection

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Automatic Route Selection Page 68 Automatic Route Selection At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators, data users Reports Affected ARS, Extension Directory, Extension Information, Remote Access (DISA) Information Mode Hybrid/PBX only...
  • Page 118 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Automatic Route Selection Page 69 At a Glance - Continued System Programming Allow or restrict remote access users (without barrier codes) continued from using selected lines/trunks (including ARS calls placed over a private network for Release 6.0 or later systems): Allow or restrict remote access users (with barrier codes) from using selected lines/trunks (including ARS calls placed over a...
  • Page 119 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Automatic Route Selection Page 70 NOTE: In Release 6.0 and later systems (Hybrid/PBX mode only), local system users can use ARS to access lines/trunks connected to another MERLIN LEGEND Communications System or to a DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server (ECS) or DEFINITY ProLogix Solutions system.
  • Page 120 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Automatic Route Selection Page 71 analog data calls, while BRI lines and other PRI lines support both voice and digital data calls. — Facility Restriction Level. A value from 0 to 6 associated with the route.
  • Page 121 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Automatic Route Selection Page 72 CAUTION: Unless networked systems are collocated, each system should have at least one loop-start line connected to the PSTN. The line is required to allow connection of a power-failure telephone to the Power-Failure Transfer (PFT) jack on a module as a power outage backup and for correct routing of emergency and other N11 calls.
  • Page 122 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Automatic Route Selection Page 73 and Pause. For Release 6.0 or later systems (Hybrid/PBX mode only), refer to the Network Reference for information on prepended digits for private network calls. ARS also provides an absorb (ignore) digit capability for each route.
  • Page 123 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Automatic Route Selection Page 74 How ARS Works A user hears inside dial tone on an SA button and dials the ARS access code (usually a ) to connect to ARS, then dials a call. If the extension is restricted or toll-restricted and the number dialed is not on the Allowed List, or if the number dialed is on the Disallowed List, the user receives a system error tone.
  • Page 124 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Automatic Route Selection Page 75 If ARS finds no match and the first digit is not 0, it chooses the Default Local Table. First Digit a 1 (Not an Equal Access Code) ARS eliminates the Default Local, Dial 0, Special Number, and Local Exchange Tables and proceeds as described below.

  • Page 125: Ars Table Selection

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Automatic Route Selection Page 76 START Is the dialed number 411, 611, Use Special 811, 911, or 10xxx Numbers Table (equal access code)? Use the table. Compare first three Is the first Is first...

  • Page 126: Ars Route Selection Within A Table

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Automatic Route Selection Page 77 Route Selection within the Table Once the table is selected, ARS checks the subpatterns within the table (if applicable) and the restrictions on the routes. START Selected Table If appropriate for...

  • Page 127: Subpattern Selection

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Automatic Route Selection Page 78 Subpattern B Is Call Time after Subpattern B Dial Call and start and before Select Table Subpattern B stop? Subpattern A Figure 3.
  • Page 128 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Automatic Route Selection Page 79 NOTE: In Release 6.0 and later systems (Hybrid/PBX mode only), FRLs associated with extension numbers apply both to ARS calls and to local and non-local dial plan-routed calls over private networked trunks, including those used to reach non-local dial plan extension numbers.
  • Page 129 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Automatic Route Selection Page 80 Calls made to the equal access code (10 xxx ) are always routed immediately over the main pool, whether or not they appear in other ARS tables. People who are restricted from using a particular ARS route hear a high-low error tone, indicating that the call cannot be completed.
  • Page 130 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Automatic Route Selection Page 81 Authorization Code An authorization code can be entered before dialing the ARS access code. After dialing the ARS access code, you can enter an authorization code only if a Feature button or programmed Authorization Code button is used.
  • Page 131 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Automatic Route Selection Page 82 Night Service When Night Service with Outward Restriction is programmed, enter the password before dialing the ARS dial-out code, unless either the extension is assigned to an Exclusion List or the number is on the Night Service Emergency Numbers List.
  • Page 132 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Automatic Route Selection Page 83 System Access/ The ARS FRL assigned to the extension being used to make the call Intercom Buttons applies to calls made on both SA and Shared SA buttons. System The ARS access code can be renumbered.

  • Page 133: Barge-In

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Barge-In Page 84 Barge-In At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators Reports Affected Extension Information Modes Telephones All except single-line telephones Programming Code à (centralized telephone programming only) QCC Display Label Description Barge-In allows a caller to contact a co-worker in an emergency or when the caller...
  • Page 134 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Barge-In Page 85 Telephone Differences Direct-Line Consoles If a DLC operator uses Barge-In to reach someone with Coverage or Forwarding (including Remote Call Forwarding) on, the call from the operator is not directed to the destination (receiver’s) extension.
  • Page 135 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Barge-In Page 86 Display Barge-In appears on the display as a feature choice only on QCC operator consoles. On an MLX display telephone receiving a Barge-In call, the message and either the name or extension number of the person joining the call remains on the display until the receiving...
  • Page 136 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Barge-In Page 87 Recall/Timed Flash In Release 2.0 and later systems, Recall can be used by a user who has joined a call with Barge-In, as well as by the user who has been interrupted.

  • Page 137: Basic Rate Interface (Bri)

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Basic Rate Interface (BRI) Page 88 Basic Rate Interface (BRI) At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators, digital data users Reports Affected System Information ( ), BRI Information Modes Key, Hybrid/PBX...
  • Page 138 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Basic Rate Interface (BRI) Page 89 Description BRI, like PRI, is a standard protocol for accessing Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) services. By using BRI, the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System can connect its users to the speed and accuracy of ISDN services.
  • Page 139 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Basic Rate Interface (BRI) Page 90 Terminology Lines/Trunks In this section on BRI, lines are the representations that appear on extensions or are put into pools. Trunks are the facilities that link switches. For all trunks except DS1 (T1 or PRI) and BRI, inside line numbers have a one-to-one correspondence to line/trunk jacks.
  • Page 140 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Basic Rate Interface (BRI) Page 91 For the different switches, Multiline Hunt Group has the following capabilities: ® 5ESS . Multiline Hunt is available for voice-only and digital data-only applications.
  • Page 141 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Basic Rate Interface (BRI) Page 92 Service Profile A Service Profile (SP) defines the interface on a BRI line between the central office and an ISDN terminal. It specifies the parameters and their values necessary to provide services to the terminal.
  • Page 142 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Basic Rate Interface (BRI) Page 93 The loop clock source on any 100D module in T1 mode emulating tie trunks The local clock source on any 100D module NOTE: Ports that are not in service should never be programmed as clock sources.
  • Page 143 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Basic Rate Interface (BRI) Page 94 T308 Timer. Times the delay in network response when the communications system sends a release message to clear a call. Other timers and counters used by the system are not programmable: N200 Counter.
  • Page 144 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Basic Rate Interface (BRI) Page 95 displayed on the telephone. Called party information is usually displayed on the second screen of the MLX display. Hyphens are inserted between the digits of the Calling Party Number for incoming calls, for example, 555-1234 for a 7-digit display and 123-555-1234 for a 10-digit display.
  • Page 145 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Basic Rate Interface (BRI) Page 96 Considerations and Constraints Because the 391A, 391A1, and 391A2 power supplies have limited capacity, when one of these power supplies is used, the total number of 800 NI-BRI modules and 100D modules in a single carrier cannot exceed three.
  • Page 146 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Basic Rate Interface (BRI) Page 97 Conference Calls on BRI lines can be part of a conference call processed by the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System, not by the central office. The MERLIN LEGEND Communications System determines the number of active parties on the call.

  • Page 147: Call Waiting

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Call Waiting Page 98 Call Waiting At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, DLC operators Reports Affected Extension Information Modes Telephones All except QCC Programming Codes Feature Code Ã...
  • Page 148 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Call Waiting Page 99 A call received on an automatic dial-in tie trunk A call transferred to the extension NOTE: The user does not hear a call-waiting tone for a call received on a personal line unless the business subscribes to call-waiting service from the local telephone company.
  • Page 149 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Call Waiting Page 100 Telephone Differences Queued Call Consoles Call Waiting cannot be used on QCCs; the calls are already queued. The operator releases a call to a busy extension either by selecting from the display or by pressing the Release button.
  • Page 150 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Call Waiting Page 101 Camp-On A user with no available buttons to receive a transferred call hears the call-waiting tone when a co-worker uses Camp-On to transfer a call, even if Call Waiting is not activated.
  • Page 151 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Call Waiting Page 102 Primary Rate Interface Call Waiting is provided on PRI lines at extensions so programmed. The and T1 call-waiting tone at an extension is not blocked by PRI lines. Until the call is answered, answer supervision is not returned to the network and the caller hears regular ringback instead of call-waiting ringback.

  • Page 152: Callback

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Callback Page 103 Callback At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, DLC operators, data users Reports Affected Extension Information, Remote Access (DISA) Information, System Information ( Modes Telephones All except QCC...
  • Page 153 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Callback Page 104 Selective. Callback is activated only when a caller chooses it by dialing a feature code or, on multiline telephones, by pressing a programmed Selective Callback button.
  • Page 154 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Callback Page 105 In order to use Callback with pools consisting of loop-start lines, the loop-start lines must be programmed for reliable disconnect. Mode Differences Hybrid/PBX Mode Callback can be used for busy extensions and for outside calls on pools where all lines/trunks are busy.
  • Page 155 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Callback Page 106 Ã Cancel a callback request by lifting the handset and dialing while listening to inside dial tone. The system sends a confirmation tone to indicate that the request is canceled.
  • Page 156 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Callback Page 107 Digital Data Calls Videoconferencing systems that can dial feature codes using # can use Selective Callback. When a pooled line becomes available or the busy video system is idle, the queued call is made, one B-channel at a time.
  • Page 157 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Callback Page 108 Forward and In Release 4.1 and later systems, if all SA or ICOM buttons are busy at Follow Me the forwarding extension, the call is automatically forwarded. continued In Release 4.0 and prior systems, if all SA or ICOM buttons are busy at the forwarding extension, the caller hears busy tone and the call is not...
  • Page 158 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Callback Page 109 Park Calls waiting in a callback queue cannot be parked. Personal Lines The Callback feature cannot be used to request a busy personal line. See “Line Request”...
  • Page 159 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Callback Page 110 Transfer A queued callback call cannot be transferred, but calls transferred to busy extensions are eligible for Callback. When a user reaches a busy extension while transferring a call, he or she can use Automatic Callback or Selective Callback to queue the call before completing the transfer.

  • Page 160: Caller Id

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Caller ID Page 111 Caller ID At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators, data users Reports Affected SMDR, System Information ( ), GS/LS Trunk Information Modes Telephones MLX Display only...
  • Page 161 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Caller ID Page 112 LS-ID Delay Option Caller ID information is sent from the central office during the first silent interval of ringing. Because it is possible to answer a call before this information arrives, you can turn on the LS-ID Delay option, which suppresses ringing until the Caller ID information arrives.
  • Page 162 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Caller ID Page 113 Forwarding and specify forwarding across the network, over PRI tandem trunks only, to a non-local extension with an MLX display telephone. When the call is received on the destination MLX display telephone, the user sees the Caller ID information.
  • Page 163 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Caller ID Page 114 Caller ID/PRI ANI Comparison Caller ID information arrives between the first and second ring at an extension. PRI ANI uses the second screen of the telephone display to show the called party number, while Caller ID generally uses this page to display the facility number.
  • Page 164 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Caller ID Page 115 Forward and In Release 6.1 and later systems (Hybrid/PBX mode only), Forward can Follow Me be used to send calls to a non-local extension across a private network. continued Caller ID information is sent with the forwarded call if PRI tandem trunks connect the systems.
  • Page 165 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Caller ID Page 116 Transfer If Caller ID information is available, the caller’s telephone number is shown on Line 1 of the first screen. Outgoing call information is not displayed.

  • Page 166: Calling Restrictions

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Calling Restrictions Page 117 Calling Restrictions At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators, data users Reports Affected Extension Directory, Extension Information, Remote Access (DISA) Information Modes Telephones System Programming...
  • Page 167 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Calling Restrictions Page 118 At a Glance - Continued Factory Settings Extensions Outward/Toll Restriction Unrestricted ARS FRL 3 (range 0–6) Pool Dial-Out Code No access to any pool VMI Ports Outward/Toll Restriction Outward...
  • Page 168 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Calling Restrictions Page 119 Outward Restriction for VMI Ports In Release 3.1 and later systems, any port programmed as a VMI port is programmed with outward restriction on. If the system manager wants to allow access to the voice messaging system Outcalling feature, the outward restriction applies to Outcalling calls.
  • Page 169 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Calling Restrictions Page 120 NOTE: In Release 6.0 Version 11 and later systems, the FRL of the VMI port must be equal to or greater than the FRL of the UDP route. See the Network Reference for details.
  • Page 170 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Calling Restrictions Page 121 Considerations and Constraints In Hybrid/PBX mode, an outward-restricted extension can receive a PSTN call or can make or receive a private network call (Release 6.0 or later systems) but cannot be used to make an ARS call, except to emergency numbers.
  • Page 171 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Calling Restrictions Page 122 Feature Interactions Allowed/ When used with calling restrictions, Allowed Lists can permit the dialing of Disallowed Lists specific numbers (such as emergency numbers) from an outward- or toll-restricted extension.
  • Page 172 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Calling Restrictions Page 123 Forward and A user with an outward- or toll-restricted extension cannot forward calls to Follow Me a number (outward or toll) unless the number is on an Allowed List for that extension.

  • Page 173: Camp-On

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Camp-On Page 124 Camp-On At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators Reports Affected System Information ( Modes Telephones All except single-line telephones and data equipment Programming Code Feature Codes (Call Waiting Pickup)
  • Page 174 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Camp-On Page 125 To use Camp-On, the feature must be activated while the person is listening to ringing, a busy tone, or call-waiting ringback. Camp-On cannot be activated at other times, and no error tone sounds when a caller unsuccessfully tries to use Camp-On at an inappropriate time.
  • Page 175 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Camp-On Page 126 Single-Line Telephones Calls can be camped on to single-line telephones, but single-line telephone users cannot use Camp-On. Feature Interactions Call Waiting A user with no buttons available to receive a transferred call hears the call-waiting tone when a caller uses Camp-On to transfer a call, even if Call Waiting is not activated.
  • Page 176 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Camp-On Page 127 UDP Features In Release 6.0 and later systems (Hybrid/PBX mode only), Camp-On does not work for calls at non-local extensions.

  • Page 177: Centralized Voice Messaging

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Centralized Voice Messaging Page 128 Centralized Voice Messaging At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators Modes Hybrid/PBX Description For MERLIN LEGEND Communications Systems of Release 6.1 or later, a network functionality has been added that allows a MERLIN LEGEND system without a voice messaging system (VMS) to use the VMS of another MERLIN LEGEND system.

  • Page 178: Centrex Operation

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Centrex Operation Page 129 Centrex Operation At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators Reports Affected System Information ( Modes Telephones All touch-tone telephones System Programming Specify mode of operation: For additional programming requirements, see “Recall/Timed...
  • Page 179 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Centrex Operation Page 130 To use the features available through Centrex, dial a Centrex feature code from a touch-tone telephone or analog data device. Some features must be programmed for customers by the telephone company at the central office (CO).

  • Page 180: Full Centrex Service

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Centrex Operation Page 131 Central Office Central Office (Exter (External Calls) (External Calls) nal Calls) Centrex Service Centrex Service • 4-digit Centre • 4-digit Centrex Calls 4-digit Centrex Calls x Calls •...

  • Page 181: Limited Centrex Service

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Centrex Operation Page 132 Figure 5. The extension user must be aware of the level where he or she is when making a call or activating a feature. Central Office Central Office (Exter...
  • Page 182 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Centrex Operation Page 133 A switchhook flash, feature access code, or Feature button-press is interpreted as intended for the Centrex service. In limited Centrex service: The communications system operates in Key or Hybrid/PBX mode. Intercom calls can be made between communications system extensions.
  • Page 183 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Centrex Operation Page 134 Transfers with consultation and conferences cannot be performed for extensions that have Centrex Transfer via Remote Call Forwarding active. Similarly, in a limited Centrex configuration that includes an automated attendant application, that application must support and be set to unsupervised transfer operation.
  • Page 184 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Centrex Operation Page 135 With full Centrex, the Recall or Flash button and fixed-function buttons (Conf, Transfer, and Drop) control Centrex functions. Corresponding communications system functions can be programmed on buttons if any are available (see “Recall/Timed Flash”...
  • Page 185 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Centrex Operation Page 136 telephone may mean the installer must renumber the system, because the removed numbers are not automatically reassigned and their removal leaves empty places in the sequential numbering of extensions. See “System Renumbering”...
  • Page 186 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Centrex Operation Page 137 Behind Switch Mode For full Centrex configuration, the communications system must be in Behind Switch mode. Behind Switch mode does not support MERLIN MAIL, MERLIN LEGEND Mail, AUDIX Voice Power, Call Accounting System (CAS), or Call Management System (CMS).
  • Page 187 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Centrex Operation Page 138 Analog Multiline Telephones On analog multiline telephones, special ringing patterns differentiate various call types. If personalized ringing is used, the personalized ring comes after the distinctive pattern.
  • Page 188 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Centrex Operation Page 139 Feature Interactions Authorization Code In Release 6.0 and later Key or Hybrid/PBX mode systems, forwarding features, including Centrex Transfer via Remote Call Forwarding but excluding Follow Me, can be activated or deactivated at an extension on the system by entering the authorization code for the extension on the same system from which calls are to be forwarded.
  • Page 189 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Centrex Operation Page 140 Speed Dial During periods of high traffic, users may experience a delay in obtaining dial tone from the Centrex service. This could cause misdialing when using System Speed Dial or Personal Speed Dial.

  • Page 190: Conference

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Conference Page 141 Conference At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators Reports Affected System Information ( Modes Telephones MLX telephones and analog multiline telephones except MLC-5 cordless telephone.
  • Page 191 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Conference Page 142 Leaving a Conference The conference originator can leave the conference by pressing the Hold button (the conference continues). If a conference originator (excluding a QCC operator) leaves a conference by either hanging up or selecting another line, the entire conference is disconnected.
  • Page 192 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Conference Page 143 SECURITYlALERT: If the system selects a voice button, the caller hears a beep instead of ringing. If a person does not answer at the destination extension and the originator completes the conference, the conversation of the other parties is broadcast on that extension’s speaker.
  • Page 193 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Conference Page 144 Telephone Differences Queued Call Consoles To arrange a conference call using a QCC, the operator presses the Conf button after receiving a call or dialing the first outside number or extension. The green LED next to the Call button flashes to indicate that the person is on hold for the conference.
  • Page 194 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Conference Page 145 add another participant, select another line button, dial the next number, and press the Conf button again. Pressing the Conf button a second time connects all participants, including you.
  • Page 195 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Conference Page 146 If a single-line telephone with a timed or positive disconnect (for example, Lucent Technologies model 2500YMGK, 2500MMGK, or 8110M) is used, pressing the switchhook disconnects the call.
  • Page 196 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Conference Page 147 Basic Rate Interface The MERLIN LEGEND Communications System supports up to five continued people on a conference: two within the system, two outside the system, and the call originator.
  • Page 197 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Conference Page 148 CTI Link When performed by a QCC operator or a DLC operator not using a CTI continued application, the Conference feature generates screen pop at screen-pop- capable destinations.
  • Page 198 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Conference Page 149 Headset Options Headset Auto Answer is disabled and must be activated manually while an MLX telephone user with a headset is setting up a conference. Hold The conference originator receives the hold reminder tone when a conference is on hold for more than one minute because the originator is...
  • Page 199 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Conference Page 150 Service Observing In Release 6.1 and later systems, Service Observing does not interfere with the use of the conference feature by observed extensions. While observing an extension, Service Observers cannot use the Conference feature;...
  • Page 200 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Conference Page 151 UDP Features In Release 6.0 and later systems (Hybrid/PBX mode only), calls to a non-local dial plan extension are treated as outside calls for the purpose of conferencing.

  • Page 201: Coverage

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Coverage Page 152 Coverage At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, DLC operators, data users Reports Affected Direct Group Calling Information, Extension Information, Group Coverage Information, Operator Information System Information ( Modes Telephones...
  • Page 202 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Coverage Page 153 At a Glance - Continued System Programming In releases prior to 4.1, change delay for Cover button continued programmed for Delay Ring; change additional delay before call is sent to Group Coverage receivers: In Release 4.1 and later systems, change the delay for Primary Cover buttons programmed for Delay Ring;...
  • Page 203 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Coverage Page 154 At a Glance - Continued Factory Settings Extensions Coverage On (inside and outside calls covered) Coverage Inside On (inside and outside calls covered by VMS) Coverage VMS 3 rings (range 1–9) Group Coverage Ring...
  • Page 204 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Coverage Page 155 — The QCC queue is programmed to be a receiver for the group. — A calling group is programmed to be a receiver for the group (this option can be used to provide voice mail coverage for a coverage group).

  • Page 205: Ring Delays Affecting Coverage

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Coverage Page 156 user or system manager can program Cover buttons with Ring Timing options: Immediate Ring, Delay Ring, or No Ring (see Table Table 4. Ring Delays Affecting Coverage Factory Timer...

  • Page 206: Ring Timing Options

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Coverage Page 157 Table 4. Continued Factory Timer Setting Range Description Secondary Cover 2 rings 1–6 rings Release 4.1 and later systems, programmable for Ring Delay each extension.

  • Page 207: Ringing On Individual Coverage (Receiver) Buttons

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Coverage Page 158 Table 6. Ringing on Individual Coverage (Receiver) Buttons Ringing Option Primary Cover Secondary Cover Immediate Ring Immediately After sender’s telephone rings 2 times ( SC , fixed) Delay Ring After sender’s telephone rings 1–6...
  • Page 208 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Coverage Page 159 queue is not counted in the 8-receiver maximum for the group. Because QCC calls are queued, an operator cannot distinguish a coverage call from any other type.
  • Page 209 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Coverage Page 160 Selective Coverage When an extension has calls covered, all of its eligible calls are covered unless the sender uses one of the following coverage options: Coverage Off turns off all coverage.

  • Page 210: Calls Eligible And Calls Ineligible For Coverage

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Coverage Page 161 Do Not Disturb. Calls go to coverage, if programmed. NOTE: In Release 6.0 and later systems (Hybrid/PBX mode only), non-local UDP calls are treated as outside calls by the system and by Selective Coverage features: Coverage Off, Coverage Inside, and Coverage VMS off.
  • Page 211 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Coverage Page 162 2. If a sender sets the Ring Timing option for No Ring on any personal line, Pool, SA, or ICOM buttons, calls arriving on those buttons do not go to coverage.
  • Page 212 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Coverage Page 163 — Only the QCC queue — Only a calling group In Release 4.1 and later systems, the Group Coverage Ring Delay is set for each sender’s extension.
  • Page 213 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Coverage Page 164 The sender’s telephone is forced idle for system programming or centralized telephone programming. The sender’s telephone is not responding (for example, not connected). The sender has activated Remote Call Forwarding.

  • Page 214: Group Coverage Call Delivery Rules (Release 4.1 And Later Systems)

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Coverage Page 165 Table 8. Group Coverage Call Delivery Rules (Release 4.1 and Later Systems) Sender Primary Coverage Secondary Coverage Sent to Group Receiver Type Status Receiver Status Receiver Status Coverage after ...
  • Page 215 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Coverage Page 166 Table 9. Group Coverage Call Delivery Rules (Release 4.0 and Prior Systems) Individual Coverage Call Delivered to Group Receiver Type Sender Status Receiver Status Coverage after...

  • Page 216: Receivers Unavailable (Release 4.1 And Later Systems Only)

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Coverage Page 167 Settings: Primary Cover Ring Delay = 2 rings Secondary Cover Ring Delay = 2 rings Group Coverage Ring Delay = 3 rings Sender is available Red LED on Receiver A Immediate ring...

  • Page 217: Group Coverage Only Or All Individual Coverage Receivers Unavailable (Release 4.0 And Prior Systems)

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Coverage Page 168 Settings: Delay Ring Interval = 2 rings Secondary Delay Interval = 3 rings Immediate ring Receiver A Group Cover Ring option: Group 1 Immediate Green LED flashes...

  • Page 218: Individual (Primary And Secondary) And Group

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Coverage Page 169 Settings: Primary Cover Ring Delay = 2 rings Secondary Cover Ring Delay = 2 rings Group Coverage Ring Delay = 3 rings Red LED on Receiver A Immediate ring Primary Cover...

  • Page 219: Individual (Primary And Secondary) And Group Coverage Ringing Patterns (Release 4.0 And Prior Systems)

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Coverage Page 170 Settings: Delay Ring Interval = 2 rings Secondary Delay Interval = 2 rings Coverage Delay Interval = 3 rings Receiver A Primary Cover Ring option: Ext.
  • Page 220 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Coverage Page 171 Cover to Voice Mail with Escape to System Operator When DID or an auto attendant is used, users receive calls directly, without the intervention of an operator.

  • Page 221: Primary Coverage

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Coverage Page 172 Primary Coverage If eight or fewer extensions require coverage to the system operator, use delayed Primary Coverage or Secondary Coverage to allow calls to be covered by the operator.

  • Page 222: Phantom Calling Groups

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Coverage Page 173 message, the operator uses Direct Voice Mail to transfer the caller to the extension’s voice mail. The caller leaves a message, and the extension’s message LED goes on.
  • Page 223 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Coverage Page 174 Call comes in for ext 101. Rings at ext 101. Covers to Operator Operator answers Operator transfers to 201 (Voice Mail). Figure 12. Phantom Calling Groups Phantom Extensions If more than 30 extensions require coverage to the operator, phantom extensions can be used after the maximum number of phantom calling groups is reached.

  • Page 224: Phantom Extensions

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Coverage Page 175 button and move it to a virtual button that is not actually on the physical telephone. This conserves buttons and prevents accidental calls to 114 from ringing at the extension.

  • Page 225: Coverage And Direct Voice Mail

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Coverage Page 176 Cover to Personal Secretary before Voice Mail If you need coverage by a personal secretary who is not a system operator at an operator console, then Primary Coverage can be used on the secretary’s telephone.
  • Page 226 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Coverage Page 177 Considerations and Constraints In Release 2.0 and later systems, if a receiver calls a sender for whom he or she is covering and the sender is busy or unavailable, the call proceeds to other points of coverage.
  • Page 227 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Coverage Page 178 When Group Coverage is the only type of coverage programmed for a sender, the QCC queue should not be programmed along with Group Cover buttons on multiline telephones.
  • Page 228 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Coverage Page 179 Telephone Differences Direct-Line Consoles A DLC can be both an Individual or Group Coverage receiver and a member of a coverage group. Queued Call Consoles The QCC cannot be a sender for either Individual or Group Coverage.
  • Page 229 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Coverage Page 180 Single-Line Telephones A single-line telephone can be a sender for either Individual or Group Coverage. A single-line telephone can be a receiver for Individual Coverage. It can be a receiver for Group Coverage only when it is a member of a calling group assigned as a receiver for a coverage group.
  • Page 230 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Coverage Page 181 Call Waiting A call to a sender with Call Waiting turned on goes to Individual and/or Group Coverage first. If all coverage points are busy, the sender receives the call-waiting tone.
  • Page 231 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Coverage Page 182 Do Not Disturb When a sender turns on Do Not Disturb, Individual Coverage or Group Coverage receivers for that sender can call the sender. All other calls to the sender go to coverage.
  • Page 232 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Coverage Page 183 Group Calling In Release 6.0 and later systems, coverage calls directed to a calling continued group are not subject to queue control. Hold Coverage calls answered by any type of receiver can be put on hold.
  • Page 233 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Coverage Page 184 Personal Lines When a principal user is assigned a personal line, calls arriving on the personal line follow that user’s coverage pattern, if any. Calls received on personal line buttons on senders’...
  • Page 234 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Coverage Page 185 Ringing Options Calls received on line buttons programmed for No Ring are not sent to coverage. Primary Cover, Secondary Cover, and Group Cover buttons can be programmed for Immediate Ring, Delay Ring, or No Ring.
  • Page 235 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Coverage Page 186 Transfer A call answered on any Cover button can be transferred. Calls transferred to a sender are eligible for Individual and/or Group Coverage. However, the sender hears a call-waiting tone if he or she is using Coverage Off to prevent calls from going to coverage and does not have an available SA or ICOM button to receive a transferred call.

  • Page 236: Cti (Computer Telephony Integration) Link

    CTI applications to interact with the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System over a local area network (LAN). The CTI link is the system’s hardware and software interface to the Lucent Technologies ® PassageWay Telephony Services product, which supports the Windows ®...
  • Page 237 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features CTI (Computer Telephony Integration) Link Page 188 extensions. For additional information about this operation, see “Private Network Operation (Release 6.0 and Later Systems Only)” on page 195.
  • Page 238 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features CTI (Computer Telephony Integration) Link Page 189 Additional equipment and software are needed, depending on the software the LAN is using: If using Novell NetWare version 3.12, 4.11, or 4.1: —...
  • Page 239 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features CTI (Computer Telephony Integration) Link Page 190 NOTE: In this case, the only information that the application can collect about the caller is the remote telephone number. A transfer of a call that has been answered by a voice-response unit NOTE: In Release 6.0 and later systems, transferred calls from non-local...
  • Page 240 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features CTI (Computer Telephony Integration) Link Page 191 NOTE: In a transfer or conference with consultation, available on inside calls only, the user initiating the transfer or conference calls the destination extension and speaks to the person at that extension before completing the transfer.
  • Page 241 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features CTI (Computer Telephony Integration) Link Page 192 Power Dial Power Dial is an application feature where software on a user’s computer initiates a voice call on a specified telephone to an inside or outside number. It is generally used by people who must make a large volume of calls to individuals whose telephone numbers are stored in a customer or client database.
  • Page 242 CAUTION: The Maintenance procedures that you use to busy-out and restore a module are normally reserved for Lucent Technologies technicians only. When you add a CTI link, the system performs the following actions: Reverts button programming to the default for a non-operator MLX...
  • Page 243 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features CTI (Computer Telephony Integration) Link Page 194 Deactivates forwarding to the extension Removes the extension from membership in calling groups Removes the extension from membership in coverage groups Changes the Extension Directory label for the extension to Sets the Alarm feature to the default setting (on) for a CTI link Restricts dial access to pools for the extension...
  • Page 244 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features CTI (Computer Telephony Integration) Link Page 195 You cannot program a CTI link port on an MLX module with firmware vintage 29. Use an earlier or later vintage. Because CTI link programming requires that you busy-out the control unit slot where the MLX module with the CTI link is being added or removed, either you must use SPM software to program the CTI link, or the link must be located on a...
  • Page 245 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features CTI (Computer Telephony Integration) Link Page 196 For an incoming PSTN call that enters the private network on a PRI trunk with an ANI of length shorter than seven digits and crosses PRI tandem trunks only, the recipient PassageWay Telephony Services client display depends on the PassageWay Telephony Services application implementation.
  • Page 246 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features CTI (Computer Telephony Integration) Link Page 197 Telephone Differences Queued Call Consoles Because an operator position cannot use a CTI application, a call to an operator QCC does not initiate screen pop.
  • Page 247 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features CTI (Computer Telephony Integration) Link Page 198 Coverage When an extension is programmed as a CTI link, it is removed from membership in coverage groups. When a call is transferred from a programmed Cover button on an unmonitored DLC, screen pop is not initiated at the destination extension, even if it is using a CTI application.
  • Page 248 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features CTI (Computer Telephony Integration) Link Page 199 Service Observing In Release 6.1 and later systems, Service Observing cannot be programmed on a CTI link. Extensions serving as CTI links cannot be programmed as Service Observers nor as members of Service Observing groups.

  • Page 249: Digital Data Calls

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Digital Data Calls Page 200 Digital Data Calls At a Glance Users Affected Users with digital data communications devices or videoconferencing systems only Reports Affected Extension Directory, Extension Information Modes Key, Hybrid/PBX Factory Settings...
  • Page 250 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Digital Data Calls Page 201 If a videoconferencing system requires two B-channels but does not have an ISDN-BRI interface (some older group video systems have V.35 interfaces, for example), it may need to use the adjunct extension numbers of two different MLX extension jacks.
  • Page 251 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Digital Data Calls Page 202 The MLX extension numbers used to add 2B data capability must correspond to the adjunct extension number for the MLX telephone. By default in a two-digit numbering plan, these adjunct extensions are numbered with the digit “7”...

  • Page 252: Applications

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Digital Data Calls Page 203 second call continues to ring at the sending system. (See “Feature Interactions,” later in this topic, for more information.) In Release 6.0 and later systems (Hybrid/PBX mode only), when MERLIN LEGEND and/or DEFINITY ECS or DEFINITY ProLogix Solutions systems are connected in private networks, 2B digital data calls across these networks can take place over PRI tandem trunks or T1-emulated tie data tandem trunks, at...
  • Page 253 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Digital Data Calls Page 204 Auto Dial A terminal adapter can make a call using an Auto Dial button by dialing the virtual number of the button (for example ).
  • Page 254 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Digital Data Calls Page 205 Coverage Individual Coverage is not recommended for 2B data calls. Because a coverage receiver can have only one Cover button for each coverage sender, only a 1B data call arrives at the receiver.
  • Page 255 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Digital Data Calls Page 206 Hold Data calls cannot be put on hold. 2B data video calls require both B-channels at a video workstation. For this reason, if a call is on hold at a passive-bus MLX telephone when a 2B call comes in, the passive-bus MLX telephone cannot retrieve the held call until the 2B video call is over.
  • Page 256 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Digital Data Calls Page 207 Pools If a videoconferencing system is programmed to have a single Pool button, two calls to that pool result in a 1B data call. However, if two separate pools are assigned to a videoconferencing system extension, then a 2B data call can be established.

  • Page 257: Direct-Line Console

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Direct-Line Console Page 208 Direct-Line Console At a Glance Users Affected DLC operators only Reports Affected System Information ( ), Operator Information, Extension Information Modes Telephones ®...
  • Page 258 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Direct-Line Console Page 209 Description A Direct-Line Console (DLC) is an answering position that system operators use Answer outside calls that are not directed to an individual user or group. Answer inside calls.
  • Page 259 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Direct-Line Console Page 210 A multiline telephone, assigned as a DLC through system programming, can use both operator features and telephone features available for non-operator multiline telephones to increase call-handling efficiency.
  • Page 260 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Direct-Line Console Page 211 Mode Differences Hybrid/PBX Mode If QCCs are assigned with DLCs, a QCC must be connected to the first extension jack on the first MLX module in the first carrier as the primary system operator position.
  • Page 261 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Direct-Line Console Page 212 All Dial 0 calls are directed to the QCC queue and do not ring at any DLC positions. A DLC cannot use Position Busy, which is available only for QCCs. A DLC cannot be assigned as a position-busy backup for a QCC.
  • Page 262 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Direct-Line Console Page 213 CTI Link A DLC’s SA calls can be controlled by a CTI application. When they are, the DLC position functions like any other MLX or analog multiline extension that is using a CTI application.
  • Page 263 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Direct-Line Console Page 214 Hold When programmed systemwide, DLC operator automatic Hold places an active call on hold when a DLC operator presses another line button. How Hold works depends on the type of call and its appearance on the telephone: When one-touch Hold is programmed systemwide and the operator...
  • Page 264 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Direct-Line Console Page 215 Park Eight park zone codes (factory set extension numbers 881–888) are automatically reserved for parking calls from a DLC. These numbers cannot be assigned to the DSS buttons on a MERLIN II System Display Console.
  • Page 265 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Direct-Line Console Page 216 UDP Features In Release 6.0 and later systems (Hybrid/PBX mode only), outside Auto Dial buttons can be programmed with non-local extension numbers. In Release 6.1 and later systems, DSS buttons can be programmed with non-local extensions.

  • Page 266: Direct Station Selector

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Direct Station Selector Page 217 Direct Station Selector At a Glance Users Affected Operators Reports Affected Operator Information Modes Telephones MLX-20L, MLX-28D System Programming Assign extension numbers selected when DSS buttons are pressed: More Maximums...
  • Page 267 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Direct Station Selector Page 218 Dialing of non-local extensions (Release 6.1 and later systems) The DSS, shown in Figure 15, has an array of 50 buttons, called DSS buttons , with red LEDs.

  • Page 268: Direct Station Selector

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Direct Station Selector Page 219 DSS Buttons Page Buttons Message Status Button Reserved Buttons Figure 15. Direct Station Selector Each of the 50 DSS buttons corresponds to one of three extension numbers. The specific extension number is determined by the Page button that an operator presses.
  • Page 269 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Direct Station Selector Page 220 Remote access dial code LDN (the extension for the QCC queue) The use and definition of each DSS button’s LED depend on the local extension represented by the button and on whether the operator position is used for normal call handling, calling group or CMS supervisory operation, Extension Status in Hotel configuration, or message status operation.

  • Page 270: Results Of Pressing Dss Button While Active On A Call: Dlc Position With One-Touch Hold

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Direct Station Selector Page 221 Table 10. Results of Pressing DSS Button while Active on a Call: DLC Position with One-Touch Hold Extension Type Result Individual, An outside caller is put on hold, an SA or ICOM button is selected calling group, automatically, and the extension number is dialed automatically.

  • Page 271: Results Of Pressing Dss Button While Active On A Call: Dlc Position With One-Touch Transfer

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Direct Station Selector Page 222 Table 11. Results of Pressing DSS Button while Active on a Call: DLC Position with One-Touch Transfer Extension Type Result Individual or calling The caller is put on hold, transfer is initiated, an SA or ICOM button group is selected automatically, and the extension number is dialed...

  • Page 272: Results Of Pressing Dss Button While Active On A Call: Qcc Position

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Direct Station Selector Page 223 Table 12. Results of Pressing DSS Button while Active on a Call: QCC Position Extension Type Result Individual or calling The caller is put on hold, the transfer is initiated, and the extension group is dialed automatically.
  • Page 273 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Direct Station Selector Page 224 non-local dial plan extension does not indicate the true state of the extension. Do Not Disturb information is not conveyed because the LED is extinguished. Using the Inspect button only provides the extension number for a non-local dial plan extension.

  • Page 274: Led Meanings For Normal Call-Handling Operation

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Direct Station Selector Page 225 Table 13. LED Meanings for Normal Call-Handling Operation LED Status Extension Type Meaning Individual The person is not on the telephone and is not using Do Not Disturb.

  • Page 275: Led Meanings For Supervisor Operation Without Message Status Active

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Direct Station Selector Page 226 NOTE: Fast flashing is applicable only to DSS buttons for individual extensions. Slow flashing is applicable to DSS buttons for individual extensions, calling group extensions, and line/trunk numbers.
  • Page 276 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Direct Station Selector Page 227 Extension Status Operation (Hotel Configuration) When Extension Status is in Hotel configuration, the Extension Status feature is assigned to and removed from individual DLCs through system programming (see “Extension Status”...

  • Page 277: Led Meanings For Hotel Extension Status Operation With Message Status Active

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Direct Station Selector Page 228 While the position is in Message Status operation, the red LEDs next to the DSS buttons for user extensions indicate whether or not the Message LED has been turned on by a system operator.

  • Page 278: Led Meanings For Supervisor Or Hotel Extension Status Operation With Message Status Active

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Direct Station Selector Page 229 Table 17. LED Meanings for Supervisor or Hotel Extension Status Operation with Message Status Active LED Status Extension Type Meaning Individual The person is not on the telephone and is not using Do Not Disturb.
  • Page 279 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Direct Station Selector Page 230 Operator park zone codes must be included in the extension number range specified for one of the Page buttons. If a local extension is busy because features are being assigned through system or centralized telephone programming, the red LED next to the associated DSS button is on to indicate the busy condition.
  • Page 280 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Direct Station Selector Page 231 Camp-On When Camp-On is used to complete a transfer and the call returns, the LED of the DSS button associated with the extension transfer destination stays off and does not flash as it does for a transfer return.
  • Page 281 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Direct Station Selector Page 232 Hold When programmed systemwide, DLC operator automatic Hold places an active call on hold when a DLC operator presses another line button. How Hold works depends on the type of call and its appearance on the telephone: When one-touch Hold is programmed systemwide and the operator...
  • Page 282 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Direct Station Selector Page 233 Last Number Dial An extension dialed by pressing a DSS button is not stored for Last Number Dial. Messaging When an operator presses the Message Status button on a DSS, the LEDs for local extensions on the DSS reflect only messages left by an operator’s using the Send/Remove Message or Leave Message features and not messages left by any co-worker (non-operator) using the Leave...
  • Page 283 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Direct Station Selector Page 234 Service Observing In Release 6.1 and later systems, a Service Observer can use a DSS button to enter a local extension number to establish an observing session.
  • Page 284 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Direct Station Selector Page 235 Transfer The Transfer option of one-touch Hold applies only to outside calls on a DLC, not on a QCC. The operation of one-touch Hold varies according to the type of call and button appearance: When one-touch Hold is programmed systemwide and the operator is active on a Personal Line, pressing a DSS button also puts the...
  • Page 285 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Direct Station Selector Page 236 UDP Features In Release 6.0 systems (Hybrid/PBX mode only), a DSS button cannot be used for a non-local extension. In Release 6.1 and later systems (Hybrid/PBX mode only), a DSS button can be used for a non-local extension, but no busy indication a non-local extension appears on the DSS.

  • Page 286: Direct Voice Mail

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Direct Voice Mail Page 237 Direct Voice Mail At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators Reports Affected Extension Directory Modes Hybrid/PBX, Key Telephones MLX Display Label Programming Code Feature Code Description...
  • Page 287 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Direct Voice Mail Page 238 If you have a programmed Direct Voice Mail button, you can sends a call directly to voice mail while transferring or making a call by pressing the Direct Voice Mail button.
  • Page 288 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Direct Voice Mail Page 239 Feature Interactions Centralized Voice Only extensions on the same MERLIN LEGEND system can use Direct Messaging Voice Mail (DVM). DVM does not work when calling a non-local extension.

  • Page 289: Directories

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Directories Page 240 Directories At a Glance Users Affected System Directory Telephone users Extension Directory MLX display telephone users Personal Directory MLX-20L telephone users Reports Affected Direct Group Calling Information, Extension Directory, Label Information, System Directory, System Information Modes...
  • Page 290 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Directories Page 241 Description The Directory feature is a built-in, interactive telephone book that stores listings of names and telephone or extension numbers. People with MLX display telephones can dial numbers by selecting listings from the display.
  • Page 291 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Directories Page 242 Extension Directory Extension Directory listings are established and changed only through system programming, using the Labeling feature. Each listing consists of a 7-character name field and a number field of up to four digits.
  • Page 292 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Directories Page 243 In Release 2.1 and later systems, when an MLX telephone other than an MLX-20L is plugged into a port that has a Personal Directory resource allocated, and the Personal Directory does not contain any entries, the Personal Directory resource is released and can be programmed to be used by another user.
  • Page 293 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Directories Page 244 à To scroll through the listings, select either to display the next seven à entries or to display the previous seven entries. To display the telephone number associated with an individual listing, select Ã...
  • Page 294 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Directories Page 245 Feature Interactions Account Code Entry An MLX-20L telephone user can program an account code as a listing in a Personal Directory. Enter the account code from the display by activating Account Code Entry and selecting the directory entry containing the actual account code.
  • Page 295 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Directories Page 246 Personal Lines A System or Personal Directory can be used to dial numbers on a personal line. An Extension Directory is used only for inside calls and cannot be used to dial calls on a personal line.

  • Page 296: Display

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Display Page 247 Display At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators Modes Telephones MLX display telephones, MERLIN II System Display Console, BIS-22D, BIS-34D System Programming “Labeling”...
  • Page 297 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Display Page 248 The level of support the display provides depends on the telephone and, in Release 6.0 and later systems, on the display preference programmed for an MLX extension: The displays on analog multiline telephones provide call-handling information but do not support menu-driven telephone programming,...

  • Page 298: Call-Handling Displays

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Display Page 249 Table 18. Call-Handling Displays Sample Displays Making Calls Analog Multiline When a user makes a call, the digits appear on the display as they are dialed with the dialpad or with any of the quick-dialing features (Auto Dial, Speed Dial, Directories, Last Number Dial, or Saved Number Dial).
  • Page 299 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Display Page 250 Table 18. Continued Sample Displays Receiving Calls (continued) Analog Multiline If PRI-based extension identification and/or ANI No display are available, the number of the caller is shown on Line 1 of an MLX display.
  • Page 300 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Display Page 251 Considerations and Constraints The date and time shown on MLX telephones is controlled by the processor module in the control unit. When the date or time changes, the control unit sends the message to MLX telephones one at a time, which can cause a slight difference in the time and/or date displayed on each telephone.

  • Page 301: Line Display Home Screen

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Display Page 252 IN CONFERENCE MAR 15 12:30 Menu Home Inspct More Figure 16. 2-Line Display Home Screen When the extension is idle, Line 2 of the Home screen shows the date and time. If the timer is running or there is a programmed Alarm button, this information is also shown on Line 2.

  • Page 302: Line Display Menu Screen

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Display Page 253 MENU MODE: Select Feature Msgs Post Ctrst> Home Menu Inspct More Figure 18. 2-Line Display Menu Screen MENU MODE: Select Feature More Home Press HOME to Exit Inspct Menu...

  • Page 303: Feature Screen Options

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Display Page 254 Table 19. Feature Screen Options Telephone ... Feature Options 2-by-24 Display 7-by-24 Display Is on hook or has a Last Number Dial dial tone on an Pickup Group* inside line Pickup...

  • Page 304: Line Display Inspect Screen For Programmed Button

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Display Page 255 Inspect Screens The Inspect screen, illustrated in Figures and 21, appears when the you press the Inspct button and then press a line button. Two kinds of information can appear: If the button is associated with a call, calling information is displayed.
  • Page 305 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Display Page 256 Analog Multiline Display Telephones The following types of information appear on the 1-line by 16-character or 2-line by 40-character display of an analog multiline display telephone: Call-Handling Information.
  • Page 306 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Display Page 257 Feature Interactions Sample Displays Feature Description Analog Multiline Account When you activate the feature, the display prompts for an Code Entry account code. As the code is dialed, it appears on the screen next to the prompt.
  • Page 307 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Display Page 258 Sample Displays Feature Description Analog Multiline Automatic Only the ARS dial-out code and the dialed number are Route displayed. Digits added by ARS Selection before the dialed number and digits ignored by ARS are not...
  • Page 308 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Display Page 259 Sample Displays Feature Description Analog Multiline Call Waiting When a call is waiting, a message appears. Camp-On After Camp-On is activated, the No display MLX display shows a feedback message.
  • Page 309 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Display Page 260 Sample Displays Feature Description Analog Multiline Conference During the conference, the No display number of participants is shown continued on Line 1 of the display. The conference originator can view Caller ID or ISDN calling party information, if available,...
  • Page 310 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Display Page 261 Sample Displays Feature Description Analog Multiline Date and In Release 1.1 and later systems, when the system or Time MLX display telephone is set for continued operation in French or Spanish, the date displays as day month,...
  • Page 311 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Display Page 262 Sample Displays Feature Description Analog Multiline Do Not When a user dials an extension that has Do Not Disturb Disturb activated and is covered by continued another extension, the display depends on the type of button...
  • Page 312 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Display Page 263 Sample Displays Feature Description Analog Multiline Extension When a supervisor changes an No display agent’s ES status, the Status supervisor is prompted to select continued the agent.
  • Page 313 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Display Page 264 Sample Displays Feature Description Analog Multiline Forward For outside calls, Page 2 shows No display Page 2: No Caller ID the line the call came in on and, continued if ISDN calling party information or Caller ID is available, the...
  • Page 314 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Display Page 265 Sample Displays Feature Description Analog Multiline Group When a group member with an Page 1: MLX telephone receives an Calling No calling group label: outside call for the group, the continued type of call is shown on the...
  • Page 315 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Display Page 266 Sample Displays Feature Description Analog Multiline Inspect An MLX telephone user can No display inspect the contents of programmed buttons by pressing the Inspct button and then pressing the programmed button.
  • Page 316 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Display Page 267 Sample Displays Feature Description Analog Multiline Messaging When a user has a message, the display shows the name or continued extension of the caller and, on MLX telephones, the time and date the message was left.
  • Page 317 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Display Page 268 Sample Displays Feature Description Analog Multiline Messaging The type of message does not allow a calling group continued message-waiting receiver to distinguish between a message left for the calling group and a fax or personal message.
  • Page 318 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Display Page 269 Sample Displays Feature Description Analog Multiline Park When a call is parked, a confirmation is displayed. On a QCC, returning parked No display calls are identified by call type and the name or extension number of the operator who...
  • Page 319 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Display Page 270 Sample Displays Feature Description Analog Multiline Programming When an analog multiline MLX-20L: telephone user enters extension programming, a confirmation appears on the display. An MLX telephone user sees the first extension programming screen.
  • Page 320 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Display Page 271 Sample Displays Feature Description Analog Multiline Reminder When Reminder Set is activated, the extension number Service and either the set time or an indication that no time has been set is displayed.
  • Page 321 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Display Page 272 Sample Displays Feature Description Analog Multiline Saved When an MLX telephone user No display presses a programmed Saved Number Number Dial button, a Dial confirmation is displayed.
  • Page 322 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Display Page 273 Sample Displays Feature Description Analog Multiline Transfer On MLX telephones, when the No display transfer is completed, a continued confirmation is displayed. Calls returning from transfer are identified by call type and by the name and extension to which the call was transferred.
  • Page 323 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Display Page 274 Sample Displays Feature Description Analog Multiline For an incoming call from an extension in the non-local dial Displays plan (Release 6.0 and later systems, Hybrid/PBX mode only), only calls conveyed on private PRI tandem trunks...

  • Page 324: Do Not Disturb

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Do Not Disturb Page 275 Do Not Disturb At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, DLC operators Reports Affected Extension Information Modes Telephones All except QCC and single-line telephones Programming Code MLX Display Label Description...
  • Page 325 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Do Not Disturb Page 276 Considerations and Constraints Do Not Disturb must be programmed onto an available button. If you turn on Do Not Disturb while receiving a call (ringing or voice-announced), the caller continues to hear ringback (or a voice-announced caller may stay on the line), but you do not hear ringing.
  • Page 326 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Do Not Disturb Page 277 Feature Interactions Auto Dial When you turn on Do Not Disturb, the green LEDs next to all Auto Dial buttons programmed with your extension go on. Barge-In Barge-In overrides Do Not Disturb.
  • Page 327 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Do Not Disturb Page 278 Display In Release 2.0 and later systems, when a multiline telephone user with coverage turns on Do Not Disturb and calls are sent to coverage receivers, the receiver with a display sees a message when answering the call;...
  • Page 328 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Do Not Disturb Page 279 Service Observing In Release 6.1 and later systems, a Service Observer can observe calls even if the observed extension uses the Do Not Disturb feature. Activating Do Not Disturb at a Service Observer extension does not block the Service Observer from being alerted when a call comes into an observed extension.

  • Page 329: Extension Status

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Extension Status Page 280 Extension Status At a Glance Users Affected DLC operators, hotel supervisors/rooms, calling group supervisors/members, Call Management System (CMS) supervisors/members Reports Affected Direct Group Calling Information, SMDR, System Information ), Extension Information Modes Telephones...
  • Page 330 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Extension Status Page 281 At a Glance - Continued System Programming Designate either Hotel or Calling Group/CMS mode: In Hotel mode, activate Extension Status on DLC: More Hardware Printer for reports...

  • Page 331: Extension Status For Hotel Mode

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Extension Status Page 282 Table 20. Extension Status for Hotel Mode Extension Status LED Status Meaning Room is occupied and telephone is in regular call-handling state. Flashing Room is unoccupied and ready for cleaning;...
  • Page 332 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Extension Status Page 283 In Hotel mode, the MERLIN MAIL, MERLIN LEGEND Mail, or AUDIX Voice Power outcalling feature does not work. In Hotel mode, when Auto Dial buttons are used to monitor the status of telephones (instead of buttons on a DSS), the green LED next to the button indicates extension status (0, 1, or, 2), and the red LED indicates message status.
  • Page 333 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Extension Status Page 284 To change the status of a telephone, a DLC operator or supervisor activates Extension Status (if not already active) and then presses a programmed button for Status 0, Status 1, or Status 2, and finally presses the Auto Dial or DSS button for the telephone.
  • Page 334 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Extension Status Page 285 HotLine Extension Status is not recommended for HotLine extensions because HotLine extensions cannot dial the # codes to change the Extension Status.

  • Page 335: Fax Extension

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Fax Extension Page 286 Fax Extension At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators Reports Affected Direct Group Calling Information, Extension Directory, Extension Information, Label Information Modes Telephones Tip/ring for fax extension.
  • Page 336 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Fax Extension Page 287 a Message LED, the Message LED turns on. Single-line telephone users without a Message LED hear a stutter dial tone when a message is waiting. Telephones located off premises are unable to receive message-waiting indications.

  • Page 337: Forced Account Code Entry

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Fax Extension Page 288 Do not use this feature for fax machines connected to analog multiline telephones with a General Purpose Adapter (GPA). In a GPA configuration, features cannot be assigned to the fax independently of the telephone.

  • Page 338: Forward And Follow Me

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Forward and Follow Me Page 289 Forward and Follow Me At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators Reports Affected Extension Information, Operator Information Modes Telephones Sending All except QCC Receiving...
  • Page 339 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Forward and Follow Me Page 290 Description Forward and Follow Me provide two ways for a user to send calls to another number. Calls can be forwarded to: An inside extension (for example, when a user is temporarily working at a different desk) A non-local extension at another system in a private network (Release 6.0...
  • Page 340 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Forward and Follow Me Page 291 Forwarding in a Private Network For Release 6.0 systems (Hybrid/PBX mode only), Remote Call Forwarding can be used in combination with Caller ID. The LS-ID Delay option must be programmed to On for each line connected to the 800 GS/LS-ID module.
  • Page 341 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Forward and Follow Me Page 292 Centrex Transfer via Remote Call Forwarding In Release 6.0 and later systems, in full and limited Centrex systems, Centrex Transfer via Remote Call Forwarding allows the remote call forwarding of outside calls that arrive on Centrex loop-start facilities.
  • Page 342 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Forward and Follow Me Page 293 When a user activates or deactivates a forwarding feature by dialing his or her authorization code, the activating and forwarding extensions must be on the local switch.
  • Page 343 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Forward and Follow Me Page 294 Use of Forward or Follow Me Whether calls are sent by using Forward or using Follow Me depends on where the feature is activated: Forward and Remote Call Forwarding are activated at a user’s own extension or from an outside telephone by remote access.
  • Page 344 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Forward and Follow Me Page 295 Call Eligibility for Forwarding Features NOTE: In Release 6.0 and later systems, when the Centrex Transfer via Remote Call Forwarding feature is used, only outside calls arriving on analog Centrex loop-start lines are remote call-forwarded.
  • Page 345 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Forward and Follow Me Page 296 Calls received on a personal line (an outside line assigned to a button on the telephone) are forwarded to outside numbers by using Remote Call Forwarding only under the following circumstances: The extension must be assigned as the principal user of the personal line through system programming.

  • Page 346: Forwarded Call Ringing

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Forward and Follow Me Page 297 Table 22. Forwarded Call Ringing Telephone Type Calls Forwarded to Inside Extension Outside Number Multiline In Release 4.1 and later systems, if SA or ICOM Forwarding buttons are all busy, the call is forwarded immediately, telephone does not...
  • Page 347 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Forward and Follow Me Page 298 Considerations and Constraints On multiline telephones, Forward should be programmed on a button so that the LEDs provide a visual reminder when calls are being forwarded. A user can forward calls to only one extension or outside telephone number.
  • Page 348 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Forward and Follow Me Page 299 A user who shares a personal line cannot join a call in progress forwarded to an outside telephone number unless the user shares both the personal line on which the call was received and the line/trunk selected to forward the call to the outside number.
  • Page 349 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Forward and Follow Me Page 300 In Release 4.0 and prior systems, a call arriving on an SA or ICOM line to a busy forwarding extension is not forwarded. The caller hears a busy tone. The Forwarding Delay setting cannot be copied from one extension to another because it is not associated with a button.
  • Page 350 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Forward and Follow Me Page 301 Queued Call Consoles Calls cannot be forwarded from a QCC to another extension or an outside number. (A QCC operator uses Position Busy instead.) However, users can forward calls to an individual QCC.
  • Page 351 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Forward and Follow Me Page 302 also use Follow Me by pressing the Feature button, selecting the feature from the display, and dialing the forwarding telephone’s extension. In Release 6.0 and later systems, you may activate or deactivate Forward or Remote Call Forwarding from a local system multiline telephone by first entering your authorization code.
  • Page 352 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Forward and Follow Me Page 303 NOTE: In Release 6.0 and later systems using Centrex Transfer via Remote Call Forwarding, a Pause character may be required after the that you dial for Centrex line access.
  • Page 353 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Forward and Follow Me Page 304 Allowed/ A user with an outward- or toll-restricted telephone cannot forward calls to Disallowed Lists an outside number unless the number is on an Allowed List assigned to and Calling the restricted extension.
  • Page 354 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Forward and Follow Me Page 305 Callback For Release 6.0 systems (Hybrid/PBX mode only), Remote Call Forwarding can be used in combination with Caller ID. The LS-ID Delay option must be programmed to On for each line connected to the 800 GS/LS-ID module.
  • Page 355 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Forward and Follow Me Page 306 Call Waiting Call Waiting does not apply to forwarded calls because the system tries the destination telephone instead of the forwarding telephone. However, if the call is not forwarded for any reason (for example, because the user has tried to use Remote Call Forwarding from a restricted telephone), Call Waiting functions normally.
  • Page 356 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Forward and Follow Me Page 307 CTI Link When an MLX extension is programmed as a CTI link (Release 5.0 and later systems only), forwarding is deactivated for that extension. In Release 6.0 and later systems, if a PassageWay Telephony Services client extension with a call on an analog Centrex loop-start line attempts to conference or to transfer to an extension with Centrex Transfer via...
  • Page 357 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Forward and Follow Me Page 308 Display When an MLX display telephone user turns Follow Me on or off, the continued display prompts for the forwarding extension. After the feature is activated, the message appears.
  • Page 358 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Forward and Follow Me Page 309 Music On Hold In Release 6.0 and later systems where extensions are using the Centrex Transfer via Remote Call Forwarding feature, do not program Music On Hold as the transfer audible.
  • Page 359 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Forward and Follow Me Page 310 Remote Access To forward calls to an outside telephone number, dial and the continued forwarding extension number. Then dial one of the following: the ARS or pool dial-out code (Hybrid/PBX mode only), the Idle Line Access code (usually ;...
  • Page 360 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Forward and Follow Me Page 311 System Access/ A Shared SA button cannot be used to turn on Forward or Remote Call Intercom Buttons Forwarding for the principal’s telephone. Calls received on a Shared SA button are not forwarded.

  • Page 361: Group Calling

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Group Calling Page 312 Group Calling At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators Reports Affected Dial Plan Information, Direct Group Calling Information, Extension Information, System Information ( Modes Telephones Supervisor...
  • Page 362 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Group Calling Page 313 At a Glance - Continued System Programming Assign maximum number of calls allowed in calling group continued queue (Release 6.0 and later systems): More More Dial calling group ext.
  • Page 363 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Group Calling Page 314 At a Glance - Continued Maximums Calling groups Extensions for each group 20 local, 1 non-local (Release 6.1 or later systems) Calling groups for each extension Calling groups for each line/trunk...
  • Page 364 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Group Calling Page 315 Description Group Calling is used to direct incoming calls to a specific group of telephones (a calling group ). A calling group is a team of individuals who answer and handle the same kinds of calls, for example, high-volume work groups such as sales, service, marketing, repair, and technical support.
  • Page 365 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Group Calling Page 316 for the system. For a summary of what callers hear while waiting in queue or being transferred, see Table 30, page 439. In addition, an announcement device can be assigned to the group to play a recorded announcement to each waiting caller, in the order that the calls arrive in the queue.
  • Page 366 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Group Calling Page 317 The extension is not ringing or busy on another call. The extension does not have a call on hold (except for a call awaiting transfer).

  • Page 367: Eligibility Of Calling Group Calls For Queue Control

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Group Calling Page 318 Private network calls (Release 6.0 or later systems only) NOTE: Dial-in tie trunks, including private tandem tie trunks (Release 6.0 and later systems, Hybrid/PBX only) cannot be assigned directly to calling groups.
  • Page 368 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Group Calling Page 319 When a call is not eligible for queue control, it is added to the calling group queue, even if that queue has reached or exceeded the programmed maximum number of calls.
  • Page 369 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Group Calling Page 320 Hunt Type The placement of each extension in the hunting sequence used by the system to search for an available calling group member is determined by the order in which each extension is assigned to the group during system programming.
  • Page 370 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Group Calling Page 321 Delay Announcements Delay announcement devices play a message for callers waiting in a calling group queue, explaining the delay to the caller or asking that the caller continue to wait. In Release 5.0 and later systems, each calling group can have up to 10 primary delay announcements and one secondary delay announcement device, a maximum of 11 per group.
  • Page 371 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Group Calling Page 322 In Release 5.0 and later systems, the system manager can specify the extension for an optional secondary delay announcement and use system programming to set the interval (0–900 seconds) between announcements.
  • Page 372 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Group Calling Page 323 In Release 6.0 and later systems, activation of the Prompt-Based Overflow option requires an available touch-tone receiver (TTR) when a delay announcement device assigned to a calling group answers the call.
  • Page 373 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Group Calling Page 324 sent to the alert is continuous, use only a device such as a strobe light, which stays lit until the number of calls drops below the limit. Only one external alert can be assigned to each calling group, and each external alert can be assigned to only one calling group.

  • Page 374: Overflow Threshold

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Group Calling Page 325 If the number of waiting calls is greater than or equal to the Threshold 2 value but fewer than the value for Threshold 3, the LED winks. If the number of waiting calls is greater than or equal to the highest value, Threshold 3, the LED lights steadily.
  • Page 375 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Group Calling Page 326 If you want the Overflow Threshold Time setting to be the primary source for overflow, you should specify an Overflow Threshold setting of a large number of calls (for example, 99 calls).
  • Page 376 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Group Calling Page 327 calling group or the QCC queue can provide overflow coverage for more than one calling group. If no overflow receiver is programmed, the call continues to ring in the queue until it is answered or the caller hangs up.
  • Page 377 Generic VMI. This setting is used when a voice messaging system (such as Lucent Technologies Attendant or Integrated Voice Power Automated Attendant) that does not require special signaling is connected to one or more extension jacks assigned to a calling group.
  • Page 378 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Group Calling Page 329 NOTE: In Release 6.0 systems (Hybrid/PBX mode only), each networked system should include its own voice mail and/or Auto Attendant applications as well as its own external alerts and Music On Hold sources.

  • Page 379: Checking The Effectiveness Of Delay Announcements

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Group Calling Page 330 Table 24. Checking the Effectiveness of Delay Announcements Calls Waiting for Length of Maximum No. of Secondary Secondary Announcement Calls in Queue Announcement Announcement Interval in...
  • Page 380 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Group Calling Page 331 Considerations and Constraints An extension can be a member of only one calling group. Calling groups with no members are allowed. A calling group cannot contain both local and non-local members. If a calling group has a non-local member, that member must be the only member in the calling group.
  • Page 381 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Group Calling Page 332 In a Hybrid/PBX mode system where the Most Idle hunt type (Release 5.0 and later systems only) is used, a calling group member may receive a calling group call at an SA button, then put that call on hold at the SA button.
  • Page 382 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Group Calling Page 333 In Release 5.0 and later systems, the three threshold levels, when set, are signaled only at programmed Calls-in-Queue alarm buttons. An external alert lights or sounds only when the number of calls in the queue is greater than or equal to Threshold 3.
  • Page 383 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Group Calling Page 334 Unavailable), and pressing the Auto Dial or DSS button for the group member’s extension number. Direct Station Selector In Release 5.0 and later systems, the state of a DSS button used as a Calls-in-Queue alarm button only indicates two alarm threshold levels, with either a flash or steady lighting.
  • Page 384 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Group Calling Page 335 Feature Interactions Auto Answer All A calling group member with an analog multiline telephone can use Auto Answer All when an answering machine is connected to the extension. When the feature is activated, all incoming calls ringing on the group member’s telephone (both calls for the calling group and calls to the group member’s own extension) are answered automatically by the...
  • Page 385 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Group Calling Page 336 Caller ID Caller ID information appears on the display. Outgoing call information is not displayed. Caller ID and PRI ANI information is sent from one system to another if PRI tandem trunks directly connect the systems.
  • Page 386 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Group Calling Page 337 Coverage When a calling group member with an MLX telephone receives an outside continued call for the calling group, the label of the calling group or appears on the display along with the label for the line on which the call came in.
  • Page 387 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Group Calling Page 338 Display Calling group agents with MLX display telephones see feedback messages on the display when they log into the Available state. When a calling group supervisor with an MLX display telephone logs calling group members in or out, a message appears on the supervisor’s display and on the group member’s display.
  • Page 388 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Group Calling Page 339 Multi-Function A Multi-Function Module can be a member of a calling group, can be Module assigned as a delay announcement for a calling group, or can be used to connect an external alert for a Calls-in-Queue Alarm.
  • Page 389 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Group Calling Page 340 Recall/Timed Flash A user who has received an inside calling group call can use Recall. Remote Access Remote access users cannot log into a calling group but can call into a calling group regardless of the restrictions applied.
  • Page 390 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Group Calling Page 341 SMDR Calls to calling groups are associated with the first extension that handles the call. If the call is answered by the calling group delay announcement device, the extension for the delay announcement device is recorded on the SMDR record, even if the call is later answered by a calling group member or overflow group member.
  • Page 391 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Group Calling Page 342 Transfer Voice-announced transfers cannot be made to a calling group. continued There is no limit to the number of calls that can be transferred to a calling group.

  • Page 392: Headset Options

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Headset Options Page 343 Headset Options At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators Reports Affected Extension Information Modes Telephones MLX telephones Programming Codes à (centralized telephone programming only; not applicable Headset Hang Up for QCC) Headset Status...
  • Page 393 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Headset Options Page 344 For a user or operator to be able to use a headset, a Headset Hang Up button must be programmed (centralized telephone programming) for an MLX telephone or MLX DLC.
  • Page 394 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Headset Options Page 345 A Headset Status button is a fixed feature on a QCC and cannot be deleted or changed. To use Headset Auto Answer, Headset/Handset Mute, or Headset Hang Up on a telephone or console with a Headset Status button, Headset Status must be on.
  • Page 395 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Headset Options Page 346 A Headset Auto Answer button must be programmed on the telephone or console, through either extension programming or centralized telephone programming. Users who have extensions programmed for Headset Auto Answer may also receive Caller ID information provided by a loop-start line connected to the 800 GS/LS-ID module.
  • Page 396 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Headset Options Page 347 A user can press the Speaker button to move the call from the headset to the speakerphone. Privacy should be programmed when headset users with Headset Auto Answer turned on either have Shared SA buttons or share one or more personal lines.
  • Page 397 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Headset Options Page 348 Feature Interactions Authorization Code If a call is made using an authorization code, pressing the Headset Hang Up button causes deactivation of the Authorization Code feature. Auto Dial If headset operation is turned on at the telephone or console, select a line button before dialing an extension or an outside number using Auto Dial.
  • Page 398 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Headset Options Page 349 Ringing Options Headset Auto Answer does not automatically answer calls ringing on buttons programmed for No Ring. A user must manually select the button to answer the call.

  • Page 399: Hold

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Hold Page 350 Hold At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators Reports Affected Operator Information, System Information ( Modes Telephones Feature Codes Hold Hold Release System Programming Change hold disconnect interval: More...
  • Page 400 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Hold Page 351 system operator. This hold timer is fixed at 60 seconds for telephone users. It is programmable for DLC and QCC operators, as described below. At an MLX display telephone, the message appears briefly on the display when the user first puts a call on hold.
  • Page 401 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Hold Page 352 until the operator actually hears the reminder.) The QCC Hold Return option applies only to QCC operators. This option can be set to the following values: —...
  • Page 402 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Hold Page 353 When one-touch Hold is programmed systemwide and the operator is active on a Personal Line, pressing an Auto Dial button or DSS button also puts the call on hold.
  • Page 403 If a single-line telephone user with a call on hold hangs up, the call rings back at the extension. NOTE: Some single-line telephones, such as Lucent Technologies models 2500YMGL, 2500MMGK, and 8110M, use a timed or positive disconnect. On these telephones, pressing the switchhook disconnects the call. Use the Recall or Flash button instead of the switchhook to send a switchhook flash.
  • Page 404 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Hold Page 355 Feature Interactions Allowed/ The Hold button is used to enter a wild card character in an Allowed or Disallowed Lists Disallowed List entry. Authorization Code Initiating the Hold feature after entering an authorization code deactivates the Authorization Code feature for subsequent calls.
  • Page 405 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Hold Page 356 Digital Data Calls Data calls cannot be put on hold. 2B data video calls require both B-channels at a video workstation. For this reason, if a call is on hold at a passive-bus MLX telephone when a 2B call comes in, the passive-bus MLX telephone cannot retrieve the held call until the 2B video call is over.
  • Page 406 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Hold Page 357 Personal Lines and The hold timer or operator hold timer applies to a call on hold for transfer. Pickup The user or operator hears a reminder (a beep or abbreviated ring) after the timer expires.
  • Page 407 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Hold Page 358 Transfer Calls on hold for transfer are timed so that a user or system operator hears a reminder after the timer expires. In Release 2.1 and later systems, a call that has been put on hold at a Cover, SA, Shared SA, or Pool button can be accessed by a user who has a personal line button for the call.

  • Page 408: Hotline

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features HotLine Page 359 HotLine At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users Reports Affected Extension Information Modes Telephones Single-line telephones System Programming To assign a HotLine extension: More More Dial ext.
  • Page 409 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features HotLine Page 360 The Personal Speed Dial number used at a single-line telephone HotLine can be an inside extension number, an outside number including ARS or pool access codes (Hybrid/PBX mode only), a long-distance service access code, or an Idle Line Access code (usually ).
  • Page 410 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features HotLine Page 361 A HotLine telephone cannot be connected to an Multi-Function Module (MFM) or General Purpose Adapter (GPA). Telephone Differences Only single-line telephones or tip/ring devices can be HotLine extensions. Feature Interactions Account Code Entry HotLine extensions cannot use Account Code Entry.

  • Page 411: Idle Line Preference

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features HotLine Page 362 Night Service A HotLine extension (Release 5.0 and later systems) can be a member of a Night Service group. If a HotLine extension dials an outside call and Night Service with Outward Restriction is on, either the HotLine extension number must be in the Night Service Exclusion List or the number it dials must be on the Night Service Emergency List.

  • Page 412: Inside Dial Tone

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Inside Dial Tone Page 363 Inside Dial Tone At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators Reports Affected System Information ( Modes Telephones System Programming Factory Setting Inside dial tone Description The system’s inside dial tone is heard when a user lifts the handset or presses the...

  • Page 413: Inspect

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Inspect Page 364 Inspect At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators Modes Telephones MLX display telephones Description Inspect allows an MLX display telephone user who is on a call to see call information about an incoming call that is ringing, alerting, or on hold.
  • Page 414 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Inspect Page 365 If Inspect is activated and someone makes a voice-announced call or a group page to the user, the Inspect feature is canceled and the Home screen is displayed.
  • Page 415 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Inspect Page 366 Direct Station Inspect can display limited information, such as extension number, label, Selector and number of messages, for each DSS button. To use Inspect, an operator presses the Page button for the range of extensions, then the Inspct button, and then the DSS button for an extension.

  • Page 416: Integrated Administration

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Integrated Administration Page 367 Integrated Administration At a Glance Users Affected System manager, installer Reports Affected Direct Group Calling Information, Group Coverage Information, GS/LS Trunk Information, System Information Modes Key and Hybrid/PBX Telephones...
  • Page 417 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Integrated Administration Page 368 In Release 4.1 and later systems, certain settings must be programmed by using the MLX20-L telephone used as the system programming console or the System Programming and Maintenance (SPM) software and not through Integrated Administration (see “Integrated Administration in Release 4.1 and Later Systems”...
  • Page 418 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Integrated Administration Page 369 Integrated Administration in Release 4.1 and Later Systems Because of enhancements to coverage timers in Release 4.1 and later systems, Integrated Administration cannot be used in these systems to program certain options for AUDIX Voice Power.
  • Page 419 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Integrated Administration Page 370 Application Switch Defaults Integrated Administration provides application switch (system) defaults on the Technician Maintenance menu; this menu is to be used by a qualified technician or the system manager only.

  • Page 420: Database Reconciliation Rules

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Integrated Administration Page 371 Automatic Reconciliation NOTE: The automatic reconciliation program has been disabled beginning with IS III Version 1.2. In IS III versions prior to 1.2, if a technician or system manager uses the MLX-20L console or a PC with SPM to change extension numbering on the switch, the system and the application database are no longer in agreement.
  • Page 421 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Integrated Administration Page 372 If the communications system and IS III are both being installed for the first time, the technician must do some initial programming on the system, as described in Step 1.
  • Page 422 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Integrated Administration Page 373 When first using Integrated Administration, the user automatically steps through each of these services: Automated Attendant (Immediate, Delayed, or Night Service call handling and lines and pools) Call Answer (lines and pools) Information Service (lines and pools)

  • Page 423: Screen-Labeled Function Keys For Integrated Administration

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Integrated Administration Page 374 Operation Access Integrated Administration in one of the following ways: Log in to IS III as and enter a password, if needed. The IS III menu for users appears, with the following selections for Integrated Administration: —...
  • Page 424 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Integrated Administration Page 375 Table 26. Continued Label Action Display information about the record on the current screen, such as the label associated with an extension. (Frame Management) Display options for managing the screen, such as Refresh and Resize.
  • Page 425 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Integrated Administration Page 376 NOTE: The calling group numbers and coverage group number displayed on this screen (including any changes made) are the values used for the information sent to the system whenever: Services are programmed on the System Programming/Switch Admin Form screen (see...

  • Page 426: Application Switch Defaults Screens

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Integrated Administration Page 377 Figure 22. Application Switch Defaults Screens Calling Groups The calling group numbers shown in Figure 22 are the defaults assigned to each service. Change these numbers by positioning the cursor in the appropriate field and entering a new value.
  • Page 427 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Integrated Administration Page 378 Reliable Disconnect Press ) and select (Reliable Disconnect) or (Unreliable Disconnect). When an outside caller on a loop-start line hangs up on Automated Attendant or Call Answer, a setting of may result in lost jack availability or recording of dial tone or messages from the telephone company (such...
  • Page 428 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Integrated Administration Page 379 System Programming Results When you press ), the following information is saved and sent to the system. This information replaces existing system programming of the applicable items.

  • Page 429: Extension Directory Screen

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Integrated Administration Page 380 Extension Directory Figure 23 shows the Extension Directory screen. An explanation of its use follows. Figure 23. Extension Directory Screen Extension. Enter an extension number in this field. To show information available for that extension in the application database, press );...

  • Page 430: Audix Voice Power And Audix Voice Power/Fax

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Integrated Administration Page 381 Application 1 through Application 5. The user can add the extension as an AUDIX Voice Power or AUDIX Voice Power/Fax Attendant subscriber by typing or pressing ) and selecting...
  • Page 431 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Integrated Administration Page 382 Extension. The extension displayed (nnnn) is the one entered in the Extension Directory screen. Add User to AUDIX Voice Power Cover Group. Press ) and select On initial installation only, this information is passed to the Subscriber...
  • Page 432 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Integrated Administration Page 383 No two subscribers can be assigned the same private fax extension. However, a group of individuals can use the same private fax extension, as follows: —...

  • Page 433: System Programming/Switch Admin Menu Screen

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Integrated Administration Page 384 On subsequent access , the System Programming/Switch Admin selection brings up the System Programming/Switch Admin Menu screen. Figure 25 shows this menu as it appears with only AUDIX Voice Power installed and as it appears with both AUDIX Voice Power and Fax Attendant installed.
  • Page 434 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Integrated Administration Page 385 Service. Press ) and select a service from the following list: — (Automated Attendant). This is the default for all channels. This selection also provides Call Answer and Voice Mail and, if Fax Attendant is installed, Fax Call Answer and Fax Mail services.
  • Page 435 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Integrated Administration Page 386 Add the AUDIX Voice Power coverage group (30) to the Automated Attendant calling group when the first Automated Attendant extension is added; or delete it from the calling group when the last Automated Attendant extension is deleted.
  • Page 436 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Integrated Administration Page 387 Set the hunt group type to Circular for the Fax Response calling group when the first Fax Response extension is added. Add Fax Response extension(s) to, or delete extension(s) from, the Fax Response calling group.
  • Page 437 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Integrated Administration Page 388 is selected: Add the label to, or delete it from, Voice Mail extension(s). Add the label to Voice Mail calling group (7925) when first Voice Mail extension is added;...

  • Page 438: System Programming/Switch Admin Menu Screen

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Integrated Administration Page 389 Figure 27. System Programming/Switch Admin Menu Screen Automated Attendant If a user chooses from the System Programming/Switch Admin Form screen during installation or from the System Programming/Switch Admin menu on subsequent access, the screen shown in Figure 28 appears.

  • Page 439: Automated Attendant: Immediate Call-Handling Screen

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Integrated Administration Page 390 Delete the AUDIX Voice Power coverage group from the Night Service group for affected operators (see Figure 31 on page 392) if Automated Attendant usage has been changed from Night Service to Immediate or Delayed.
  • Page 440 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Integrated Administration Page 391 Screen Results. On initial installation, the screen for the next service selected on the System Programming/Switch Admin Form screen appears (see Figures through 36).

  • Page 441: Automated Attendant: Night Service Screen

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Integrated Administration Page 392 Automated Attendant: Night Service Figure 31. Automated Attendant: Night Service Screen Channels and Extensions. The values displayed are those entered for Automated Attendant on the System Programming/Switch Admin Form screen.

  • Page 442: Call Answer Screen

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Integrated Administration Page 393 Figure 32. Call Answer Screen Channels and Extensions. The values displayed are those entered for Call Answer or Automated Attendant on the System Programming/Switch Admin Form screen.

  • Page 443: Fax Response Screen

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Integrated Administration Page 394 Figure 33. Fax Response Screen System Programming Results Add lines to, and/or delete lines from, Fax Response calling group (7924). Screen Results On initial installation, the screen for the next service selected on the System Programming/Switch Admin Form screen appears (see Figures 26 through 28).

  • Page 444: Information Service Screen

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Integrated Administration Page 395 Figure 34. Information Service Screen System Programming Results Add lines to, and/or delete lines from, Information Service calling group (7927). Screen Results On initial installation, the screen for the next service selected on the System Programming/Switch Admin Form screen appears (see Figures and 36).

  • Page 445: Message Drop Screen

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Integrated Administration Page 396 Figure 35. Message Drop Screen System Programming Results Add lines to, and/or delete lines from, Message Drop calling group (7928). Screen Results On initial installation, the screen for the next service selected on the System Programming/Switch Admin Form screen appears (see Figure...
  • Page 446 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Integrated Administration Page 397 Channels and Extensions. The values displayed are those entered for Voice Mail or Automated Attendant on the System Programming/Switch Admin Form screen. Lines/Pools.
  • Page 447 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Integrated Administration Page 398 If an AUDIX Voice Power mailbox is needed for a person with no telephone, a phantom extension (on the system) or special-purpose extension (through Integrated Administration) must be assigned to that person.
  • Page 448 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Integrated Administration Page 399 Ringing Options The total of the value programmed for Delay Ring and the value programmed for Coverage Delay Interval should be less than either the transfer return time or the VMS transfer return interval.

  • Page 449: Labeling

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Labeling Page 400 Labeling At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators Reports Affected Dial Plan, Direct Group Calling Information, Extension Directory, Group Coverage Information, Label Information, Operator Information, System Directory Modes Telephones...
  • Page 450 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Labeling Page 401 Extension Directory Listings. To identify the name of a person or room (for example, a conference room) associated with an extension. This information displays when a user receives an inside call, when a co-worker leaves a message, or when a user accesses the Extension Directory.

  • Page 451: Factory-Set Posted Messages And Their Codes

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Labeling Page 402 Table 27. Factory-Set Posted Messages and Their Codes Number Message (not modifiable in Release 2.0 and later systems, modifiable in earlier releases) (modifiable) (modifiable) (modifiable) (modifiable)
  • Page 452 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Labeling Page 403 Labels that are programmable by a user are displayed in all capital letters. Labels can contain capital letters, numbers, and eight types of characters: ampersands (&), dashes (-), spaces, periods (.), commas (,), apostrophes(’), stars (*), and pound signs (#).
  • Page 453 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Labeling Page 404 Speed Dial The telephone numbers associated with System Speed Dial codes are entered by using the programming screens to program labels for System Directory listings.

  • Page 454: Language Choice

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Language Choice Page 405 Language Choice At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators, system manager Reports Affected Extension Information, SMDR, System Information Modes Telephones MLX telephones only Feature Codes English French...
  • Page 455 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Language Choice Page 406 The system manager can program specific extensions or consecutive blocks of extensions in English, French, or Spanish as necessary. In addition, an individual MLX telephone user can choose the language most appropriate for his or her own extension.
  • Page 456 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Language Choice Page 407 Programming Report Language Through system programming, programming reports can be printed in English, French, or Spanish, regardless of the language selected for the system or for SPM.
  • Page 457 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Language Choice Page 408 Considerations and Constraints After a System Reset (cold start), the system language reverts to the default setting, English. In a system release prior to Release 1.1, if a user attempts to set the language on a telephone, he or she hears a reorder tone or an error beep.

  • Page 458: Last Number Dial

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Last Number Dial Page 409 Last Number Dial At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators, data users Reports Affected Extension Information Modes Telephones All except QCC Programming Code Feature Code MLX Display Label...
  • Page 459 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Last Number Dial Page 410 If you dial a telephone number and, after the call is connected, dial additional digits, such as an account number or password, Last Number Dial saves all digits, including those dialed after the call is connected.
  • Page 460 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Last Number Dial Page 411 Single-Line Telephones To redial a number using Last Number Dial, lift the handset (the telephone must connect to an SA or ICOM line), and then dial .
  • Page 461 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Last Number Dial Page 412 Speed Dial Telephone numbers dialed using Personal Speed Dial are stored by Last Number Dial. However, if the number includes special characters such as Pause or Stop, the special characters do not work when the number is redialed using Last Number Dial.

  • Page 462: Line Request

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Line Request Page 413 Line Request At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators Modes Telephones All except MLC-5 cordless, MDC 9000, MDW 9000, QCC, and single-line telephones Description If a user wants to make a call on a busy outside line assigned to a button, Line...
  • Page 463 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Line Request Page 414 Mode Differences Hybrid/PBX Mode In Hybrid/PBX mode, Line Request can be used for personal lines or special-purpose lines (such as WATS) assigned to line buttons on a multiline telephone.

  • Page 464: Messaging

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Messaging Page 415 Messaging At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators Reports Affected Direct Group Calling Information, Extension Directory, Extension Information, Label Information Modes Telephones Programming Codes (Operator only) Send/Remove Message...
  • Page 465 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Messaging Page 416 At a Glance - Continued Maximums Messages for each display telephone Message-Waiting Receivers for fax Message-Waiting Receivers per calling group Fax Message 10 seconds (range 0–30) Threshold Description Messaging features allow users to do the following:...
  • Page 466 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Messaging Page 417 On QCCs and MLX DLCs with an attached DSS, as well as on MERLIN II System Display Consoles, operators can use the LEDs next to the DSS buttons to determine whether an operator has turned the Message LED on.
  • Page 467 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Messaging Page 418 NOTE: In Release 6.0 and later systems (Hybrid/PBX mode only), you cannot use Leave Message to signal a non-local extension. The Leave Message feature works only when the sender, receiver, and VMS are on the same system.
  • Page 468 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Messaging Page 419 Cancel a sent message by pressing the Feature button and dialing plus the extension to which the message was sent. QCC operators cannot cancel messages they have sent.

  • Page 469: Message-Waiting Display Identifiers

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Messaging Page 420 NOTE: In Release 2.0 and later systems, when someone uses the Return Call feature for a voice messaging system, a call is returned to the voice messaging system, not to the specific VMI extension that sent the message-waiting code.
  • Page 470 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Messaging Page 421 NOTE: In Release 6.0 and later systems (Hybrid/PBX mode only), fax message waiting does not function unless the fax extensions and user extensions are located on the same system.
  • Page 471 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Messaging Page 422 Table 29. Posted Messages “Labeling” on page 400 for more information about creating posted messages. Users with MLX display telephones can post a message by pressing the Menu button, selecting ] from the display, selecting the desired message, and selecting...
  • Page 472 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Messaging Page 423 Considerations and Constraints In Release 2.0 and later systems, if a user at an analog multiline, MLX-5, or MLX-10 telephone has a programmed Posted Message button and the Do Not Disturb feature is turned on, the system automatically posts the Do Not Disturb message for callers with display telephones.
  • Page 473 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Messaging Page 424 Posting a message does not prevent the telephone from ringing. Message Waiting does not work for off-premises telephones. In Release 6.0 and later systems (Hybrid/PBX mode only), messaging features do not work across a private network.
  • Page 474 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Messaging Page 425 If a single-line telephone sends a message to a nondisplay telephone user and there is no voice messaging system, the caller receives no error indication, and no message is sent.
  • Page 475 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Messaging Page 426 Display Messages also can be received from outside callers or non-local continued extensions (if the MERLIN LEGEND system has a voice messaging system) and from an operator. On MLX display telephones, messages left by a voice messaging system are identified as , messages from an operator are identified as...
  • Page 476 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Messaging Page 427 Service Observing In Release 6.1 and later systems, if a Service Observer is deleting a Leave Word Calling (LWC) message at an MLX telephone, he or she cannot use Service Observing until the task is completed.
  • Page 477 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Messaging Page 428 UDP Features In Release 6.0 and later systems (Hybrid/PBX mode only), messaging features generally do not work across a private network. They only work for extensions connected to the same system.

  • Page 478: Microphone Disable

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Microphone Disable Page 429 Microphone Disable At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, DLC operators Reports Affected Extension Directory Modes Telephones All MLX (except QCC) System Programming Enable or disable individual MLX telephone microphones: More Factory Setting...
  • Page 479 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Microphone Disable Page 430 Telephone Differences Queued Call Consoles The microphone on a QCC cannot be disabled. Other Telephones Microphone Disable cannot be assigned to analog multiline telephones. Microphone Disable cannot be assigned to single-line telephones.

  • Page 480: Multi-Function Module

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Multi-Function Module Page 431 Multi-Function Module At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, data users Reports Affected SMDR Modes Telephones MLX telephones except QCC Hardware Tip/ring interface WARNING: RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK: Follow all warnings and cautions.
  • Page 481 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Multi-Function Module Page 432 can be assigned to the MFM independently of the MLX telephone. See “System Renumbering” on page 659 for details on specific extension numbers assigned. The ringing patterns for devices connected to an MFM are similar to those of an MLX telephone for inside calls: two rings for outside calls;...
  • Page 482 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Multi-Function Module Page 433 An external alert connected to an MFM set for SAA operation can be manually signaled, can serve as a calling group calls-in-queue alert, or can provide supplemental alerting for after-hours calls received in a Night Service group.
  • Page 483 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Multi-Function Module Page 434 When the device is used only on personal lines for supplementary answering (such as an answering machine) or ringing (such as an external alert) and lines/trunks are assigned to or removed from the associated MLX telephone, the lines/trunks should also be assigned to or removed from the MFM.
  • Page 484 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Multi-Function Module Page 435 Features and tip/ring applications that require a switchhook flash for operation (such as Messaging 2000) cannot be connected through an MFM because the system ignores the switchhook flash sent by the device.
  • Page 485 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Multi-Function Module Page 436 Other Telephones An MFM can be installed only in MLX telephones; it cannot be used with analog multiline telephones. An MFM cannot be used with a digital communications device or videoconferencing system.
  • Page 486 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Multi-Function Module Page 437 Messaging A single-line telephone with a Message LED connected to an MFM can receive message-waiting indications. HotLine A single-line telephone connected to an MFM cannot be used as a HotLine.

  • Page 487: Music On Hold

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Music On Hold Page 438 Music On Hold At a Glance Reports Affected System Information ( Modes Telephones System Programming Designate the Music On Hold extension jack: Maximums 1 Music On Hold extension for each system Description...

  • Page 488: Call Types And Transfer Audible

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Music On Hold Page 439 Table 30. Call Types and Transfer Audible Music On Hold Programmed Ringback Programmed as Type of Call as Transfer Audible Transfer Audible: No MOH Outside call directly Ringing before announce- Ringing before announcements...
  • Page 489 American Society of Composers, Artists, and Producers (ASCAP) or ® Broadcast Music Incorporated (BMI). You can purchase a Magic on Hold system, which does not require such a license, from Lucent Technologies. Feature Interactions Callback An outside caller waiting in the callback queue hears Music On Hold.
  • Page 490 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Music On Hold Page 441 Remote Access A remote access user who is waiting for a busy line/trunk pool or extension hears Music On Hold. Transfer If the system is programmed for Music On Hold, music is played only during the period before a transfer is completed by the extension originating it.

  • Page 491: Night Service

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Night Service Page 442 Night Service At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators, data users Reports Affected Extension Information, Night Service Information Modes Telephones Programming Code Feature Code MLX Display Label System Programming...
  • Page 492 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Night Service Page 443 At a Glance - Continued Maximums continued Night Service groups for Unlimited each extension Emergency telephone numbers Digits for each telephone number Extensions on Exclusion Unlimited List...
  • Page 493 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Night Service Page 444 Night Service Group Assignment Each Night Service group is associated with either an individual QCC (in Hybrid/PBX mode) or an individual DLC through system programming. A Night Service group can include the following types of members: Any type of extension One calling group (Release 2.0 and later) for each Night Service group...
  • Page 494 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Night Service Page 445 SECURITYlALERT: Avoid programming a remote access line as a destination for Night Service for any published telephone number. Professional toll-fraud criminals scan telephone directories for published local and 800 telephone numbers.
  • Page 495 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Night Service Page 446 A Night Service Emergency Allowed List of emergency numbers can include up to 10 numbers, each with no more than 12 digits. Users who do not know the Night Service password can dial only the numbers on the list;...
  • Page 496 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Night Service Page 447 extensions’ Coverage VMS Off buttons so that outside calls are no longer covered by voice mail. A user at a member extension can press the Coverage VMS Off button to change its status, regardless of Night Service operation.
  • Page 497 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Night Service Page 448 Night Service with Time Set can be deactivated through system programming for special conditions such as a midweek holiday. An answering machine connected to an 012 module or 016 (T/R) module can be set up as a member of a Night Service group to automatically answer after-hours calls.
  • Page 498 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Night Service Page 449 Queued Call Consoles The Night Service button is factory-assigned as a fixed feature on a QCC. In Release 4.1 and later systems, if an outside line is assigned to more than one QCC Night Service group and only one QCC operator activates Night Service, incoming calls on the outside line ring on extensions programmed as members of the Night Service group associated with the operator.
  • Page 499 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Night Service Page 450 Automatic Route When Night Service with Outward Restriction is programmed, a user must Selection enter the password before dialing the ARS dial-out code, unless either the extension is assigned to an exclusion list or the number is on an emergency numbers list.
  • Page 500 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Night Service Page 451 Forward and When an extension is a member of a Night Service group and Night Follow Me Service is activated, calls received at the extension are forwarded to extensions by using Forward and Follow Me but are not forwarded to outside or non-local telephone numbers when Remote Call Forwarding is used.
  • Page 501 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Night Service Page 452 Remote Access in Release 4.1 and later systems, when shared remote access is assigned to an outside line that belongs to one or more Night Service groups, incoming calls on that line receive remote access treatment when Night Service is activated on any operator position.

  • Page 502: Paging

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Paging Page 453 Paging At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators Reports Affected Dial Plan Information, Extension Information, Group Paging, System Information ( Modes Telephones + group or Page All ext.
  • Page 503 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Paging Page 454 Individual Paging An SA Voice or ICOM Voice button on a multiline telephone is used for Speakerphone Paging directed to an individual extension (also called voice-announced inside calling).
  • Page 504 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Paging Page 455 When the extension number for a speakerphone paging group is dialed by using an SA or ICOM button, the announcement over speakerphones is heard on all telephones assigned to the group.
  • Page 505 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Paging Page 456 Some group members may not hear the announcement (because they are making pages, for example), but the user is not notified unless none of the group telephones can broadcast the page, in which case the caller hears a busy signal.
  • Page 506 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Paging Page 457 Telephone Differences Direct-Line Consoles The line/trunk jack programmed for Loudspeaker Paging can be assigned to a button on an analog or digital Direct-Line Console (DLC) for one-touch access. An operator with an MLX DLC also can access a loudspeaker paging system by dialing the line/trunk number (801–880) for the line/trunk jack on which the loudspeaker paging system is connected.
  • Page 507 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Paging Page 458 Select an SA button and dial the pool dial-out code for the loudspeaker paging jack. Select an SA or ICOM button—either by pressing a Pickup button programmed specifically for the paging line or by pressing the Feature button and then dialing —followed by the paging line number (801–880).
  • Page 508 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Paging Page 459 Call Waiting Call Waiting cannot be used for calls to busy speakerphone paging groups. Camp-On Camp-On cannot be used for calls to busy speakerphone paging groups. Conference Group and loudspeaker paging calls cannot be added to a conference.
  • Page 509 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Paging Page 460 Pools In Hybrid/PBX mode, line/trunk jacks used for loudspeaker paging cannot be assigned to pools. If the extension for an incoming PRI call matches a group paging Primary Rate Interface extension, the call is treated as an unassigned Direct Inward Dial call.

  • Page 510: Park

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Park Page 461 Park At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators Reports Affected Extension Information, Operator Information, System Information ( Modes Telephones All except single-line Programming Codes Park at own extension + park zone (DLC operators only)
  • Page 511 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Park Page 462 The system also automatically reserves eight extensions (881–888) on which operators can park calls. Only operators can use these park-zone extensions. Considerations and Constraints Only system operators can use park zones.
  • Page 512 NOTE: If a single-line telephone with a positive or timed disconnect is used, for example, the Lucent Technologies model 2500YMGL or 2500MMGK, pressing the switchhook disconnects the call. With this type of telephone, the Recall or Flash button, instead of the switchhook, must be used to park a call.
  • Page 513 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Park Page 464 Callback Calls waiting in a callback queue cannot be parked. Conference Conference calls cannot be parked. If a QCC operator tries to park a conference call by pressing the Start button and then pressing the DSS button for the park zone, the park is denied and the operator is reconnected to the conference call.
  • Page 514 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Park Page 465 Multi-Function A user at an MFM cannot park a call but can pick up a call parked by Module another user. Music On Hold If Music On Hold is programmed, a parked caller hears Music On Hold.

  • Page 515: Personal Lines

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Personal Lines Page 466 Personal Lines At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators, data users Reports Affected Extension Information Modes Telephones All except QCC System Programming Assign or remove personal lines: Assign or remove principal user of a personal line: More...
  • Page 516 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Personal Lines Page 467 When two or more users answer the same call on a Shared SA or personal line button, the red and green LEDs next to the button go on, but only one person has a talk path with the caller.
  • Page 517 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Personal Lines Page 468 received on the line/trunk, the caller hears ringback even if that line/trunk does not terminate anywhere in the system. When an extension is programmed as the principal user (owner) of a personal line, only the principal user can forward calls to an outside number by using Remote Call Forwarding.
  • Page 518 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Personal Lines Page 469 In Key mode, the factory setting for personal lines assigns the first eight lines connected to the system as personal lines on all multiline telephones, including Multi-Function Modules (MFMs) connected to MLX telephones.
  • Page 519 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Personal Lines Page 470 Caller ID Caller ID information appears on the display of shared personal lines. Outgoing call information is not displayed. Calling Restrictions A user with an outward- or toll-restricted extension cannot dial a toll or outside number on a personal line button unless the number is on an Allowed List assigned to the extension, nor can the user dial a number on a Disallowed List.
  • Page 520 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Personal Lines Page 471 Digital Data Calls Personal lines can be assigned to digital communications devices and videoconferencing systems, which, ideally, should not share personal lines except with extensions at the same workstations. If they do share personal lines, the system manager should ensure that enough idle lines are available, particularly when a video system is receiving 2B data calls.
  • Page 521 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Personal Lines Page 472 Hold If a call is received on a personal line and is transferred to another user who receives the call on an SA or ICOM button and puts the call on hold, users who share the line cannot select the personal line button and pick up the call.
  • Page 522 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Personal Lines Page 473 A personal line can be assigned to an extension to represent a PRI line Primary Rate Interface with routing by dial plan. The green LED associated with the personal line and T1 lights steadily, and ringing on an SA button occurs;...

  • Page 523: Personalized Ringing

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Personal Lines Page 474 Personalized Ringing “Ringing Options” on page 593.

  • Page 524: Pickup

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Pickup Page 475 Pickup At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators Reports Affected Extension Information, Group Call Pickup Modes Telephones All (except MLC-5, which cannot be assigned to Pickup groups) Programming Codes Individual Pickup...

  • Page 525: Types Of Pickup

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Pickup Page 476 Table 31. Types of Pickup Individual Extension Line General Group Inside ringing Outside ringing Inside ringing Inside ringing Inside held Outside held Inside held Outside ringing Parked Outside ringing...
  • Page 526 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Pickup Page 477 Considerations and Constraints When Group Pickup is used to answer a call, the user cannot determine whose call is being answered. An MLX display telephone user receives call information and can determine whose call is answered only after the call is picked up.
  • Page 527 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Pickup Page 478 If a Pickup button is programmed for a specific telephone or outside line, press that Pickup button to pick up a call. Group Pickup To pick up a call ringing on any other group member’s telephone, press a programmed Group Pickup button, or press the Feature button and dial .
  • Page 528 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Pickup Page 479 Coverage An Individual or Group Coverage sender or receiver can be a member of a Pickup group. This allows Pickup to be used to answer a ringing Individual or Group Coverage call.
  • Page 529 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Pickup Page 480 Personal Lines If a call received on a personal line is transferred to another user who receives the call on an SA or ICOM button and then puts the call on hold, another user who shares the personal line cannot select the shared personal line button to pick up the call.

  • Page 530: Pools

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Pools Page 481 Pools At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators, data users Reports Affected Dial Plan Information Modes Hybrid/PBX only Telephones System Programming Assign individual lines/trunks to pools: Assign Pool buttons to telephones: Restrict telephone from using pool dial-out code: Maximums...
  • Page 531 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Pools Page 482 NOTE: On initialization of a Release 1.0 system, all loop-start and ground-start line/trunk programming reverts to loop-start. The ground-start pool never has trunks assigned to it automatically but must be programmed after the ground-start jacks are designated.
  • Page 532 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Pools Page 483 — The local system must have its networked trunks assigned to the main pool. — The local ARS access code is automatically prepended to the dialed number.
  • Page 533 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Pools Page 484 Lines/trunks assigned to pools cannot be assigned as personal lines (on buttons) on any extension except a DLC. However, calls that come in on lines/trunks assigned to pools can be programmed to be received by one or more QCC operators.
  • Page 534 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Pools Page 485 Telephone Differences Direct-Line Consoles A Pool button cannot be assigned to a DLC. A DLC operator accesses pools by dialing the pool dial-out code from an SA button or, on an MLX DLC with a DSS, by pressing the DSS button associated with the pool dial-out code.
  • Page 535 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Pools Page 486 Automatic Route ARS ensures appropriate and cost-effective use of pools. ARS and the Selection dial-access-to-pools restriction function independently of each other. If ARS restrictions are programmed to allow access to a pool, the user may seize a pool that the extension is not allowed to use under existing pool dial-access restrictions.
  • Page 536 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Pools Page 487 Personal Lines A personal line cannot be assigned to a pool. Data lines (especially T1 data) should not be put in the same pool as Primary Rate Interface voice lines.

  • Page 537: Power-Failure Transfer

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Power-Failure Transfer Page 488 Power-Failure Transfer At a Glance Modes Telephones Single-line telephones Hardware If ground-start trunks are used in Hybrid/PBX mode, KS23566, L1 ground-start buttons are required on power- failure telephones.

  • Page 538: Primary Rate Interface (Pri) And T1

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 Page 489 Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators, data users Reports Affected DS1 Information, PRI Information, SMDR Modes Key, Hybrid/PBX...
  • Page 539 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 Page 490 At a Glance - Continued Assign test line telephone number for each 100D module: Programming continued Set timer and counter thresholds for each 100D module: Assign link layer address or Terminal Equipment Identifier (TEI) of equipment connected to each D-channel: To select T1 emulation:...
  • Page 540 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 Page 491 At a Glance - Continued Maximums PRI-specific continued Digits for each telephone number sent to network for outgoing calls Digits for test trunk telephone number PRI Dial-Plan Routing...
  • Page 541 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 Page 492 At a Glance - Continued Factory Settings 100D Module continued Line Compensation 1 (range 1–5) 1 = 0.6 dB loss 2 = 1.2 dB loss 3 = 1.8 dB loss 4 = 2.4 dB loss...
  • Page 542 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 Page 493 At a Glance - Continued Factory Settings continued Link layer address or TEI 0 (range 0–63) assigned PRI Dial-Plan Routing Table Service value Empty...
  • Page 543 Northern Telecom DMS-100 Generic BCS 34 You also can link a MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 4.0 or later with a Lucent Technologies DEFINITY ECS or DEFINITY ProLogix Solutions systems for data tie-trunk connections. In Release 6.0 and later systems, PRI B-channels, T1-emulated tie voice...
  • Page 544 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 Page 495 Calling Party Number (CPN) If you subscribe to the AT&T INFO2 ANI service or another PRI caller identification network service (Release 4.2 and later), an incoming call on an ISDN line includes accompanying information about the party placing the call.
  • Page 545 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 Page 496 B-channels. The D-channel conveys signaling required to set up, control, and clear calls made over all of the B-channels. The most common configuration of a DS1 facility for PRI consists of 23 B-channels and 1 D-channel, although other combinations are possible.

  • Page 546: Pri Lines And B-Channel Groups

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 Page 497 Trunks: Line 801 Loop-start Ground-start Line 802 Line 803 OUTGOING LINE Line 804 IS SELECTABLE BY USER Line 849 B-CHANNEL Line 850 B-channels...
  • Page 547 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 Page 498 Speed. Data calls to outside destinations can be established on the same B-channels used for voice calls if the service allows. Dedicated, conditioned lines/trunks are not needed.
  • Page 548 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 Page 499 NOTE: The availability of the caller identification information may be limited by local-serving (caller’s) jurisdiction, availability, or service provider. Blocking Caller ID is possible system-wide by accessing the PRI Lines menu.
  • Page 549 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 Page 500 In Release 6.0 and later systems, T1 channels can be programmed either to emulate voice tie trunks or data tie trunks. These trunks can be used as tandem trunks linking networked systems.
  • Page 550 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 Page 501 handling similar to Direct Inward Dial (DID). It performs digit analysis on incoming calls, matches to Called Party Numbers (CdPNs), and delivers the calls to the destinations based on the respective Called Party Numbers.
  • Page 551 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 Page 502 Signaling mode (for T1 service only) NOTES: 1. Most of these settings are dependent upon the central office and the type of service (T1 or PRI) to which you subscribe.
  • Page 552 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 Page 503 — MCI 900. Providing 900 service numbers. The system supports the following local DMS-100 local exchange carrier services: —...
  • Page 553 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 Page 504 The following two methods of framing can be used by a 100D module, but the framing method chosen must match the framing at the far end: D4 Framing Format.
  • Page 554 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 Page 505 Channel Service Unit The channel service unit (CSU) is the interface between the 100D module and the DS1 facility provided by the telephone company. This facility contains 24 channels on one 4-pair wire.

  • Page 555: Line Compensation Settings

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 Page 506 Table 32. Line Compensation Settings Setting dB Loss Cable Length (22-Gauge Wire) 0–133 feet (0–40.5 meters) 133–266 feet (40.5–81 meters) 266–399 feet (81–121.5 meters) 399–533 feet (121.5–162 meters) 533–655 feet (162–199.5 meters)
  • Page 556 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 Page 507 NOTE: Through PRI, digital data using up to 64 kbps is possible only when using a DS1 facility; connections of up to 64 kbps for each channel are also possible on BRI connections in Release 4.0 and later systems.
  • Page 557 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 Page 508 Fractional Use Support. You can tailor your use of PRI B-channels with drop-and-insert equipment that allows fractional use of B-channels for non- MERLIN LEGEND data/video communications between sites at 64 kbps per channel, while keeping the remaining B-channels for MERLIN LEGEND PRI voice/data traffic.
  • Page 558 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 Page 509 PRI outgoing tables do not apply to outgoing calls on the trunk. ARS or Remote Access features can be used. The system automatically assigns Electronic Tandem Network (ETN) as the network service for the B-channel group that is assigned to the PRI tandem trunk;...
  • Page 559 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 Page 510 In Release 4.2 and later systems, these MCI services are also available: — MCI PRISM — MCI Vnet —...
  • Page 560 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 Page 511 Test Telephone Number This option assigns a test line telephone number for each 100D (DS1) module installed in the control unit that provides ISDN PRI service. Timers and Counters This option sets the timer and counter thresholds.
  • Page 561 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 Page 512 Terminal Equipment Identifier (TEI) This option assigns the link layer address of devices connected to each D-channel. Usually, only one is connected; the network assumes that its TEI is 0. PRI Call Processing Figure 38 on page 513 shows the order of call processing for both incoming and...

  • Page 562: Pri Call Processing (Non-Tandem Only)

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 Page 513 Incoming Outgoing call call (SA) (SA) (DPT) (SA) (PL) (PL) POOL B-Channel Group Foreign Exchange ARS=Automatic Route Selection DPR=Dial Plan Routing Table NS=Network Selection Table CBC=Call-by-Call Services Table DPT=Direct Pool Termination...
  • Page 563 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 Page 514 Routing by Dial Plan (Hybrid/PBX Only). Routing by dial plan is similar in concept to Direct Inward Dial (DID). It provides the ability to direct a call automatically to the proper destination for improved call distribution and call handling.

  • Page 564: Sample Pri Dial-Plan Routing Table

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 Page 515 Table 33 is a sample Dial-Plan Routing Table. Note that in the sample table all incoming calls through the Megacom 800 service are delivered to an extension whose dial-plan number is 1234.
  • Page 565 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 Page 516 NOTE: In Release 6.0 and later systems (Hybrid/PBX mode only), when a call arrives on a dial-plan routed PRI facility and its digits match an extension on the non-local dial plan, the call is routed to the appropriate non-local extension.
  • Page 566 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 Page 517 NOTE: PRI display support for Release 2.0 and later applies to MLX display telephones only. There is no PRI display support for analog multiline telephones.

  • Page 567: Sample Network Selection Table

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 Page 518 Outgoing calls can be made by accessing a personal line, a Pool, or ARS. When a call is placed, the system determines whether the line accessed is a PRI facility. If so, the system performs digit analysis with the entries in the Network Selection Table (see Table 34, page...

  • Page 568: Sample Special Services Selection Table

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 Page 519 The choices for Operator are Operator (OP), Presubscribed Common Carrier Operator (OP/P), and None. The choices for Type of Number are National (N) and International (I). The number of digits to delete can be from 0 to 4.

  • Page 569: Sample Call-By-Call Services Table

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 Page 520 Table 36. Sample Call-by-Call Services Table Entry Number 908957 908949 Patterns 908615 303843 Call Type DATA BOTH VOICE VOICE DATA BOTH...
  • Page 570 MERLIN LEGEND Communications Systems or can connect one MERLIN LEGEND Communications System to another type of PBX (for instance, a Lucent Technologies DEFINITY G1.1 or DEFINITY ECS) or to the central office with digital (Switched 56 kbps) connections. In Release 6.0 and later...
  • Page 571 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 Page 522 Direction. The tie trunk direction may be programmed in one of the following ways: Two-way (factory setting). Calls can be made in both directions. In networked Release 6.0 and later systems, use this setting for tandem tie trunks.
  • Page 572 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 Page 523 Disconnect Timing. Disconnect Timing sets a time limit, in milliseconds, that a disconnect signal must be present to be considered valid. The timing can be set to any value from 140 to 4,800 ms, in increments of 20 ms.

  • Page 573: Sample T1 Switched 56 Dial-Plan Routing Table

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 Page 524 Table 37. Sample T1 Switched 56 Dial-Plan Routing Table Entry Service T1 S56 T1 S56 T1 S56 T1 S56 Expected Digits Example # Digit deletion...
  • Page 574 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 Page 525 to the PSTN or, in a network, may be the same type of port on a non-local system. When the source for clock synchronization is a local system module, it is assigned as local .
  • Page 575 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 Page 526 Local clock source on the processor module Mode Differences Key Mode Routing by dial plan for PRI or T1 data lines is not supported in Key mode. Behind Switch Mode T1 data lines are not supported in Behind Switch mode.
  • Page 576 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 Page 527 Incoming Calls When an incoming call is given routing-by-dial-plan treatment, the green LED associated with the appearance of the line lights steadily; the LED does not flash to indicate that the line/trunk is ringing.
  • Page 577 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 Page 528 Outgoing calls using call-by-call service selection can be made by pressing a line button, pressing a Pool button, dialing a pool number, or using ARS. The Call-by-Call Services Table must be programmed for the Call-by-Call Service Selection feature to take effect.
  • Page 578 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 Page 529 Callback Callback cannot be used to request a busy PRI line assigned as a personal line, but PRI lines in a pool are eligible for Callback. An idle PRI line is not considered an available pool member unless a check determines that it is associated with an available B-channel.
  • Page 579 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 Page 530 Personal Lines A personal line can be assigned to an extension to represent a PRI line with routing by dial plan. When an incoming call arrives, the green LED associated with the personal line lights steadily, and ringing on an SA button occurs;...
  • Page 580 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 Page 531 In Release 6.0 and later systems (Hybrid/PBX mode only), PRI and T1 Tandem Switching (emulated tie voice or data tie) facilities can be private tandem trunks. To provide the facility, customers order a point-to-point T1 circuit from a service provider and use system programming to set it up for PRI or T1.

  • Page 581: Privacy

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Privacy Page 532 Privacy At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, DLC operators, data users Reports Affected Extension Directory Modes Telephones All except QCC Programming Code Feature Codes MLX Display Label Description...
  • Page 582 A single-line telephone user has no indication of whether Privacy is on or off. NOTE: Some single-line telephones, such as Lucent Technologies models 2500YMGL and 2500MMGK, use a positive or timed disconnect. On these telephones, pressing the switchhook disconnects the call. The user must...
  • Page 583 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Privacy Page 534 use the Recall or Flash button instead of the switchhook when turning Privacy on or off. Feature Interactions Barge-In Barge-In does not override Privacy. Digital Data Calls Privacy is turned on automatically during digital data calls.

  • Page 584: Programming

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Programming Page 535 Programming At a Glance Users Affected System managers Modes Telephones SECURITYlALERT: Remote System Programming. As a customer of a new communications system, you should be aware that there exists an increasing problem of telephone toll fraud.
  • Page 585 Page 536 applicable tariffs state that the customer of record is responsible for payment of all long-distance or other network charges. Lucent Technologies cannot be responsible for such charges and will not make any allowance or give any credit for charges that result from unauthorized access.
  • Page 586 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Programming Page 537 Brief descriptions of the pertinent programming paths can be found in the “At a Glance” section. Complete information about system programming can be found in System Programming .

  • Page 587: Mlx-20L Telephone And Dss

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Programming Page 538 Call and Fixed-Feature Buttons Button Labeling Card Display Buttons Direct Station Selector Handset Display Screen (DSS) Home More Menu Inspct MLX-20L Volume Feature Transfer HFAI Conf...
  • Page 588 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Programming Page 539 Direct Station Selector One or two DSSs can be used with the MLX-20L telephone. Each DSS adds 50 buttons to the system programming console. For more information about the DSS, “Direct Station Selector”...

  • Page 589: Spm Display

    ( Remote programming allows technicians to run diagnostic tests and to display information needed to maintain the system. It is also used by Lucent Technologies technical support organizations for installation and maintenance support.
  • Page 590 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Programming Page 541 System Programming Screens The system programming console display and SPM screen present step-by-step prompts throughout programming. Three different types of screens appear on the console display and SPM screen: Menu Selection Screens.
  • Page 591 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Programming Page 542 Extension Programming Extension Programming allows extension users and system operators to customize their extensions to meet personal needs. Multiline telephone users can assign a wide range of features to buttons on the telephone. Many other settings (Call Waiting, for example) that do not require button assignment can be programmed on both multiline telephones and single-line telephones.

  • Page 592: Queued Call Console (Qcc)

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Queued Call Console (QCC) Page 543 Queued Call Console (QCC) At a Glance Users Affected QCC operators Reports Affected Operator Information, System information ( Mode Hybrid/PBX Telephones MLX-20L telephones System Programming...
  • Page 593 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Queued Call Console (QCC) Page 544 At a Glance - Continued System Programming Designate calling group as QCC position-busy backup: continued More Specify return ring interval for extended calls: Assign QCC positions for message center operation: Enable or disable Voice Announce capability for QCCs (Release 4.0 and later):...
  • Page 594 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Queued Call Console (QCC) Page 545 Description The QCC is an answering position available only in Hybrid/PBX mode. The QCC is an MLX-20L telephone used by operators to do the following: Answer outside calls that are directed either to the QCC queue or to a specific QCC operator Answer inside calls either to the operator or to a specific QCC operator’s...
  • Page 595 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Queued Call Console (QCC) Page 546 calls in the QCC queue. When a call rings on a Call button, call origin information is shown on the display. In Release 4.0 and later releases, when Voice Announce for QCCs is enabled, the fifth Call button can be used to announce a call on another user’s speakerphone (providing there is an available SA button capable of receiving pages at the...
  • Page 596 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Queued Call Console (QCC) Page 547 The QCC display shows that the call is split. Once the destination has answered, the operator can press the appropriate button (Source or Destination) to speak with the party on either half of the split call.

  • Page 597: Features Available At Call Progress Stages

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Queued Call Console (QCC) Page 548 Table 38. Features Available at Call Progress Stages Call Progress Feature Displayed Display Appearance Inactive or inside dial Group Pickup tone Pickup Loudspeaker Page...

  • Page 598: Qcc Buttons

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Queued Call Console (QCC) Page 549 Fixed Feature Buttons Letters H through Z Position Forced Call 5 Alarm Busy Release Send/Remove Night Pool Call 4 Message Service Status Handset/...
  • Page 599 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Queued Call Console (QCC) Page 550 Table 39. QCC Buttons — Continued Button Description Headset Turns console headset operation on and off. When headset Status operation is on, the green LED next to the button is on; the QCC operator must use a headset or the speakerphone.
  • Page 600 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Queued Call Console (QCC) Page 551 Table 39. QCC Buttons — Continued Button Description Alarm Provides visible indication of a system alarm. When there is a system alarm, the red LED next to the button is on and the QCC operator can use Inspect to determine the number of alarms present.
  • Page 601 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Queued Call Console (QCC) Page 552 Call Types The Call Types option specifies other types of calls that ring into the QCC queue. The following types of calls may be directed to a specific QCC position with a specified queue priority level: Dial 0 calls (calls to the QCC operator) Calls to unassigned (invalid) extensions, either received on DID or dial-in...
  • Page 602 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Queued Call Console (QCC) Page 553 The factory settings can be changed so that each type of call is either directed to a different and/or additional QCC or is not directed to any of the QCC operator positions.
  • Page 603 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Queued Call Console (QCC) Page 554 Elevate Priority During high-volume calling periods, only high-priority calls may be delivered to a QCC within a reasonable amount of time. Low-priority calls can remain unanswered if there is a constant flow of higher-priority calls.
  • Page 604 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Queued Call Console (QCC) Page 555 NOTES: 1. This message also appears immediately if a QCC operator presses the DSS button for ARS or a pool dial-out code. The QCC operator can, however, dial the outside telephone number and release the call manually, even though is shown on the...
  • Page 605 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Queued Call Console (QCC) Page 556 In Release 6.1 and later systems, a calling group with a non-local member can be used for Position Busy Backup. Operator Hold Timer The Operator Hold Timer option specifies the length of time (10–255 seconds) that must elapse before an operator is reminded (with an abbreviated ring) that a...
  • Page 606 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Queued Call Console (QCC) Page 557 Calls-in-Queue Alert When the Calls-in-Queue Alert option is enabled for an individual QCC operator, the operator hears a single tone every time a new call enters the queue. By monitoring the calls-in-queue alert, the QCC operator can determine whether heavy call volumes warrant the need for additional answering positions.
  • Page 607 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Queued Call Console (QCC) Page 558 Lines/trunks cannot be programmed to ring into both the QCC queue and a calling group. Lines/trunks assigned to ring into the QCC queue also can be assigned as personal lines on one or more telephones.
  • Page 608 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Queued Call Console (QCC) Page 559 In a system with both DLC and QCC positions, the primary QCC operator position must be a QCC. All dial 0 calls are directed to the QCC queue; they do not ring at any DLC positions.
  • Page 609 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Queued Call Console (QCC) Page 560 Callback Calls to QCCs are not eligible for Callback because the calls ring into the QCC queue. Callback cannot be used on a QCC. Calling Restrictions Calling restrictions can be assigned to QCCs.
  • Page 610 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Queued Call Console (QCC) Page 561 Coverage When the QCC queue is programmed as a receiver for a coverage group continued and a call transferred to a group member is not answered, the call returns to the queue as a transfer return if the QCC return ring interval is shorter than the coverage delay.
  • Page 611 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Queued Call Console (QCC) Page 562 Forward and Calls that are forwarded to an individual QCC operator or Follow Me calls Follow Me that are signed in to a QCC can be assigned a queue priority level. When continued the QCC operator uses Position Busy, forwarded calls and Follow Me calls signed in to the QCC position continue to ring at the QCC.
  • Page 612 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Queued Call Console (QCC) Page 563 Inspect When a participant joins a conference call by using a shared outside line or a Shared SA button, the QCC display shows the correct number of participants.
  • Page 613 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Queued Call Console (QCC) Page 564 Park Eight park dial codes are automatically reserved for parking calls from a QCC. The factory-set extension numbers are 881 through 888. To assign the park zones to a DSS connected to a QCC, the extension numbers must be in the range programmed for the Page buttons.
  • Page 614 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Queued Call Console (QCC) Page 565 Remote Access If a remote caller uses a rotary phone and the system does not require a barrier code, the call, after it times out, is sent to a QCC that is assigned as a backup extension.
  • Page 615 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Queued Call Console (QCC) Page 566 SMDR When a QCC operator arranges a three-party conference (the operator and two other participants) and presses the Release button, the operator is released from the call and the other two participants remain connected.

  • Page 616: Recall/Timed Flash

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Recall/Timed Flash Page 567 Recall/Timed Flash At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, DLC operators Reports Affected Extension Information, System Information ( Modes Telephones All except QCC Programming Codes Recall (Behind Switch mode only)
  • Page 617 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Recall/Timed Flash Page 568 Recall is used by pressing a fixed or programmed Recall button (or Flash button on some single-line telephones) or dialing the Recall feature code. The Recall timer, which specifies the duration of the switchhook flash, is set through system programming.
  • Page 618 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Recall/Timed Flash Page 569 Mode Differences Hybrid/PBX Mode In Release 1.0 and 1.1 systems, Recall cannot be used on any outside call made or received on an SA button. In Release 2.0 and later systems, this restriction is removed.
  • Page 619 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Recall/Timed Flash Page 570 Telephone Differences Queued Call Consoles A QCC cannot use Recall. A Recall button cannot be programmed on the QCC, nor can the QCC use the Recall feature code. Other Multiline Telephones Analog multiline BIS telephones have a fixed Recall button that can be pressed to access the Recall feature.
  • Page 620 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Recall/Timed Flash Page 571 2. A single-line telephone user without a Recall or Flash button, or with buttons that activate telephone-only features, must press and release the switchhook to send a timed flash.
  • Page 621 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Recall/Timed Flash Page 572 Conference The Conf button is used to enter the Flash special character, which simulates pressing the Recall button in telephone numbers programmed for Directories, Auto Dial buttons, or Speed Dial codes.
  • Page 622 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Recall/Timed Flash Page 573 Personal Lines When two users have joined an outside call on a shared personal line (loop-start only), Recall can be used by either inside party. Pools If a user presses the Recall button during or after dialing, a timed flash is sent to the host switch, the accessed line is kept, the user hears dial tone,...

  • Page 623: Reminder Service

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Reminder Service Page 574 Reminder Service At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, DLC operators Reports Affected Extension Information, System Information ( Modes Telephones All except QCC Programming Codes Cancel (operators only)
  • Page 624 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Reminder Service Page 575 When Reminder service is set for a telephone, the system makes a call to the extension at or close to the preset time. (Reminder calls may arrive up to three minutes before or after the set time.) The call rings for 30 seconds or until the telephone is answered.
  • Page 625 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Reminder Service Page 576 Telephone Differences Direct-Line Consoles DLC operators can use Reminder service to set or cancel reminders for other users. An operator with a DLC sets a reminder for another telephone by: Pressing a programmed Reminder Set button, or pressing the Feature button and dialing Pressing an Auto Dial or DSS button...
  • Page 626 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Reminder Service Page 577 Single-Line Telephones Set a reminder by lifting the handset and (while listening to inside dial tone) dialing and a 4-digit time ( –...

  • Page 627: Remote Access

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Remote Access Page 578 Remote Access At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators, data users Reports Affected Remote Access (DISA) Information, SMDR Modes Telephones Touch-tone only System Programming Assign dedicated or shared remote access to lines/trunks: If barrier codes are not used, assign class of restrictions to...
  • Page 628 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Remote Access Page 579 At a Glance - Continued Factory Settings continued Restriction for Barrier Outward-Restricted Codes or Lines/Trunks Maintenance/Programming In Release 3.0 and later systems, there is no default barrier Barrier Code code.
  • Page 629 Lucent Technologies cannot be responsible for such charges and will not make any allowance or give any credit for charges that result from unauthorized access.
  • Page 630 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Remote Access Page 581 the caller has dialed the eleventh digit—giving the impression that additional digits are required—even if the barrier code length is shorter. SMDR registers 16 zeros for any remote access calls in which three failed attempts have occurred.
  • Page 631 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Remote Access Page 582 remote access calls only when Night Service is activated on the system. Remote access can be assigned in this way to any outside line connected to the system, except Direct Inward Dial (DID) trunks, PRI dial-plan routed facilities, or dial-in tie trunks.
  • Page 632 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Remote Access Page 583 Local Dial Plan. If a remote access caller dials the system on a DID, E&M, PRI B-channel with dial-plan routing, T1-emulated tie line, or T1-emulated DID trunk, the caller can be connected without entering the remote access code separately.

  • Page 633: Remote Access Routing

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Remote Access Page 584 Table 40. Remote Access Routing Facility Remote Access Routing Facility User Dials Programming Line Loop-start, ground-start, Telephone number Must be programmed for emulated loop- or dedicated or shared remote ground-start, BRI, PRI...
  • Page 634 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Remote Access Page 585 For more information, see “Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1” on page 489. “Tandem Switching” on page 671 provides additional information about default COR settings for networked systems (Release 6.0 and later, Hybrid/PBX mode), as does the Network Reference .
  • Page 635 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Remote Access Page 586 Class of Restrictions (COR) Barrier codes should be used for all lines/trunks including those that will be accessed by remote access users in Release 6.0 and later systems (Hybrid/PBX mode only).
  • Page 636 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Remote Access Page 587 setting is ignored. For networked Release 6.0 and later systems (Hybrid/PBX mode), barrier codes should be required; they are then required for non-network calls into these systems via the public switched telephone network or via the remote access code in the non-local dial plan.
  • Page 637 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Remote Access Page 588 Remote access calls ring on SA or ICOM buttons; however, the telephone rings like an outside call. Systems with DID trunks can designate a DID extension that offsite users can dial to use remote access.
  • Page 638 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Remote Access Page 589 Feature Interactions Account Code Entry A remote access user cannot enter account codes. However, if a remote access user calls an inside extension and the person at that extension enters an account code, the code overwrites the barrier code number (01–16) in the ACCOUNT field of the SMDR report.
  • Page 639 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Remote Access Page 590 Forward and Users can set up forwarding of calls to extensions or outside telephone Follow Me numbers through remote access, as long as the system manager has enabled Remote Call Forwarding.
  • Page 640 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Remote Access Page 591 Primary Rate A PRI line that has been programmed for routing by dial plan should not Interface and T1 be programmed for remote access. Service Observing In Release 6.1 and later systems, Service Observers can observe a Remote Access call if it is answered at an extension on the local system.

  • Page 641: Ringing Line Preference

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Remote Access Page 592 Ringing Line Preference “Automatic Line Selection and Ringing/Idle Line Preference” on page...

  • Page 642: Ringing Options

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Ringing Options Page 593 Ringing Options At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, DLC operators Reports Affected Extension Information, System Information ( Modes Telephones All except QCC Programming Codes Ring Timing Options (centralized telephone programming only for single-line...
  • Page 643 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Ringing Options Page 594 At a Glance - Continued Factory Settings continued Abbreviated Ring Enabled Personalized Ringing 1 (pattern numbers 1–8) Pattern Description Ringing Options refers collectively to three options that determine how users’ telephones ring when they receive calls: Ring Timing options, Abbreviated Ring options, and Personalized Ringing options.
  • Page 644 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Ringing Options Page 595 In Release 4.0 and prior systems, when a sender has both Individual and Group Coverage and an Individual Coverage receiver is available, the programmed systemwide Delay Ring Interval of one to six rings provides a delay, in addition to the systemwide Coverage Delay Interval, before calls go to Group Coverage.

  • Page 645: Distinctive Ringing

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Ringing Options Page 596 Personalized Ringing Options Personalized Ringing options allow a user to select one of eight different ringing patterns for his or her telephone, making it easier to distinguish its ring from those of other telephones.
  • Page 646 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Ringing Options Page 597 Delay Ring is especially useful on a Cover button because it gives the sender a chance to answer before the call rings at the receiver’s telephone. No Ring is appropriate for users who do not usually answer outside calls.
  • Page 647 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Ringing Options Page 598 Automatic Line The system does not automatically select outside line, SA, ICOM, or Selection Cover buttons programmed for No Ring, even when Ringing/Idle Line Preference is turned on.
  • Page 648 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Ringing Options Page 599 Forward and On multiline or single-line telephones where an SA or ICOM button is Follow Me available to receive the call, calls forwarded to an extension ring with an abbreviated ring at both the forwarding extension and the destination extension.
  • Page 649 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Ringing Options Page 600 Night Service When Night Service is turned on, calls received at a Night Service group member’s telephone ring immediately even if the line buttons are programmed for Delay Ring or No Ring.

  • Page 650: Saved Number Dial

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Saved Number Dial Page 601 Saved Number Dial At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, DLC operators Reports Affected Extension Directory Modes Telephones All except QCC and single-line telephones Programming Code MLX Display Label Maximums...
  • Page 651 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Saved Number Dial Page 602 Because the type of line button (personal, SA, or ICOM) used to make the call is not stored, select the appropriate line button before using Saved Number Dial to redial a number.
  • Page 652 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Saved Number Dial Page 603 Telephone Differences Queued Call Consoles Saved Number Dial cannot be used on a QCC. Other Multiline Telephones On a multiline telephone, to save a number using Saved Number Dial, press the programmed Saved Number Dial button before hanging up.
  • Page 653 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Saved Number Dial Page 604 HotLine Saved Number Dial is not available at HotLine extensions (Release 5.0 and later systems). Inspect In Release 2.0 and later systems, when a user presses Inspct and then a programmed Saved Number Dial button, the saved number appears on the display.

  • Page 654: Second Dial Tone Timer

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Second Dial Tone Timer Page 605 Second Dial Tone Timer At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators Reports Affected System Information ( Modes Telephones More System Programming MLX Display Labels Signal...
  • Page 655 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Second Dial Tone Timer Page 606 Considerations and Constraints Contact your central office to determine whether there is a delay before second dial tone is returned. If calls are misrouted and dropped when special services requiring second dial tone are used, consider adjusting the second dial tone timer interval.

  • Page 656: Service Observing

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Service Observing Page 607 Service Observing At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users Reports Affected Service Observing, Extension Information Modes Telephones Service Observer Extension Observed Extensions All except QCC and CTI Link Programming Codes (Centralized Telephone Programming)
  • Page 657 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Service Observing Page 608 An internal or external call must arrive on an SA button, Personal Line, Cover button, or Pool button. A call can be observed by only one Service Observer at one time No more than two internal parties can be on the call.

  • Page 658: Error Tones

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Service Observing Page 609 The following calls cannot be observed: Data call Video call Fax call Reminder Service call Page call Call answered by a Generic or Integrated VMI port. However, a call that is transferred from a Generic or Integrated VMI port can be observed.
  • Page 659 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Service Observing Page 610 When a Service Observer activates Service Observing for an extension that is not active on a call, as soon as a call is answered at that extension, the Service Observer’s telephone goes off-hook on the speakerphone, and the Mute button turns on.
  • Page 660 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Service Observing Page 611 Warning Tone The Service Observing warning tone alerts the observed extension and the other parties on the call that a Service Observer is listening in on the call. The warning tone is a single tone that occurs: at the beginning of each observed call.
  • Page 661 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Service Observing Page 612 If a Service Observer is dropped from a call for any reason, he or she is not added back to the call if conditions change. A Service Observer cannot activate Service Observing while in the following modes: Programming...

  • Page 662: Direct-Line Console (Dlc)

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Service Observing Page 613 Telephone Differences Direct-Line Console (DLC) A DLC can be a Service Observer and can be a member of a Service Observing group. Queued Call Console (QCC) Service Observing cannot be programmed on a QCC.
  • Page 663 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Service Observing Page 614 Auto Dial Service Observers can use Inside Auto Dial and DSS buttons to select extensions they want to observe. If an observed extension uses one-touch Transfer (automatic or manual), the observer is removed from the call when the call is placed on Hold for the transfer.
  • Page 664 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Service Observing Page 615 Conference Service Observing does not interfere with the use of the conference feature by observed extensions. While observing an extension, Service Observers cannot use the Conference feature; a press of the Conference button is ignored by the system.
  • Page 665 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Service Observing Page 616 Direct Voice Mail When an extension being observed transfers a call by using Direct Voice Mail, the Service Observer is dropped from that call. Directories Calls made by using System, Extension, or Personal directories can be observed.
  • Page 666 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Service Observing Page 617 Hold Service Observers cannot place observed calls on Hold. If a person at an observed extension presses Hold, the call is removed from the Service Observer until the call is re-accessed, at which point the Service Observer is re-connected to the call (if the extension is still being observed).
  • Page 667 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Service Observing Page 618 Pools If an extension uses Dial Access to make a call, the call can be observed. A call placed or answered on a Pool button can be observed. A Service Observer cannot activate Service Observing while off-hook on a Pool button.
  • Page 668 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Service Observing Page 619 System Bridging takes priority over Service Observing. If another extension Access/Shared bridges onto a call at an observed extension, the Service Observer is System Access dropped.
  • Page 669 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Service Observing Page 620 Transfer A Service Observer cannot transfer observed calls. If an observed extension transfers a call, the Service Observer is dropped from the call when the transfer is initiated and when it is completed, but the Service Observing session remains active.

  • Page 670: Signal/Notify

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Signal/Notify Page 621 Signal/Notify At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators Reports Affected Extension information Modes Telephones All except QCC and single-line telephones Programming Codes + ext.
  • Page 671 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Signal/Notify Page 622 Notify Notify allows a multiline telephone user to light an LED on another telephone. To use this feature, a Send button must be programmed at the sender’s telephone and a Receive button must be programmed at the receiver’s telephone.
  • Page 672 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Signal/Notify Page 623 Feature Interactions Auto Dial A Signal button and an Auto Dial button cannot be programmed for the same extension. If a user tries to program one of these buttons while the other is already programmed, the feature being programmed erases the previously programmed feature.

  • Page 673: Speed Dial

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Speed Dial Page 624 Speed Dial At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators, data users Reports Affected Extension Information, System Directory Modes Telephones System Speed Dial All except QCC Personal Speed Dial Multiline telephones with ten or fewer buttons, single-line...
  • Page 674 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Speed Dial Page 625 System Speed Dial numbers are programmed by using the Labeling feature. The programmed labels include the name of the business or person being called and the number dialed.
  • Page 675 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Speed Dial Page 626 The Personal Speed Dial codes used to select specific programmed numbers are 01 to 24. Because each user has the same codes from which to choose, the telephone numbers for the codes apply only to the extension for which they were programmed.
  • Page 676 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Speed Dial Page 627 Mode Differences Hybrid/PBX Mode A pool dial-out code or an Idle Line Preference access code can be included with the telephone number in a Personal Speed Dial or System Speed Dial code. To allow time to receive a local telephone company dial tone, Pause characters may be required immediately following either a pool dial-out code or an access code for a long-distance carrier.
  • Page 677 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Speed Dial Page 628 Personal Speed Dial Users of multiline telephones with more than ten buttons should not use Personal Speed Dial; doing so may delete features already programmed onto buttons. To dial a Personal Speed Dial number on a multiline telephone, press the Feature button and dial the Personal Speed Dial code (01–24) associated with the number.
  • Page 678 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Speed Dial Page 629 Authorization Code Users cannot enter authorization codes by using a System Speed Dial or Personal Speed Dial code because these features are activated by dialing .
  • Page 679 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Speed Dial Page 630 Pools A pool dial-out code can be programmed on Personal Speed Dial and System Speed Dial numbers. When a pool dial-out code is included in the number dialed, Pause characters may immediately follow the dial-out code to allow time to receive a local telephone company dial tone.

  • Page 680: Station Message Detail Recording (Smdr)

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Page 631 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators, data users, system manager Reports Affected System Information ( Modes System Programming...
  • Page 681 They can be printed on a serial printer connected to the SMDR jack. To assist further with cost allocation and unauthorized call detection, a Lucent Technologies Call Accounting System (CAS Plus V3, CAS for Windows, CAT/B, or CAT/H) can be connected to the SMDR jack on the control unit.
  • Page 682 In Release 4.2 and later systems, the SMDR feature includes enhancements to support sales and customer service calling groups; these improvements are outlined in this topic. They are designed to allow use of the Lucent Technologies MERLIN LEGEND Reporter software application, which assists in determining the...

  • Page 683: Sample Smdr Report In Isdn Format

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Page 634 SMDR Report Fields Figure 43 shows a sample SMDR report in ISDN format. The topics that follow describe each of the fields (columns) in an SMDR report. Figure 43.
  • Page 684 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Page 635 indicates either an incoming voice call with ANI or Caller ID information, or a data call on a PRI or other facility equipped to receive the caller’s number.
  • Page 685 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Page 636 When an outgoing call was originated (The system detected end of dialing.) CALLED NUMBER (Column 4) Depending upon the type of line used for a call and whether it provides caller identification information, this field displays either or a telephone number.
  • Page 686 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Page 637 Asterisk (*). For an incoming call in systems prior to Release 4.2 and in Release 4.2 and later systems with the Talk Time option disabled, this column displays an asterisk (*) only when the caller disconnected after the call was answered anywhere in the system.
  • Page 687 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Page 638 NOTE: By comparing the duration of the call (DUR. field) and the TALK field value for eligible calls, you can determine how long the caller waited, beginning at the time when the call arrived at the system.
  • Page 688 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Page 639 LINE (Column 7) The incoming or outgoing line/trunk used for the call. STN. (Column 8) For outgoing calls, Column 8 displays the extension number where the call was placed.
  • Page 689 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Page 640 TALK (Column 10) This field must be enabled through system programming and is available in Release 4.2 and later systems only. It applies only to incoming calls directed to Auto Login or Auto Logout calling groups;...
  • Page 690 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Page 641 incoming calls to Auto Login or Auto Logout calling groups, regardless of the value assigned to the Call Report option. In Release 4.1 and prior systems, if an incoming call does not satisfy the minimum call length, the call is not recorded on the SMDR report.
  • Page 691 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Page 642 In Release 4.2 and later systems with Talk Time enabled, the TALK field is left blank for all other incoming and outgoing calls. If the Talk Time option is disabled, the field does not appear on the report.
  • Page 692 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Page 643 Feature Interactions Account Code Entry The account code is printed in the ACCOUNT field of the SMDR record. If SMDR is set to record outgoing calls only, an account code cannot be entered on incoming calls.
  • Page 693 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Page 644 Coverage The extension at which an Individual or Group Coverage call is answered is shown on the SMDR report. In Release 4.2 and later systems, when an Auto Login or Auto Logout calling group is assigned as a Group Coverage receiver, calls are reported following the same rules that apply to other incoming calls for the group.
  • Page 694 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Page 645 Group Calling In addition, Release 4.2 and later systems with Talk Time enabled provide continued enhanced information about incoming calls to Auto Login or Auto Logout calling groups, helping system managers assess call center performance.
  • Page 695 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Page 646 Park If an incoming call was parked but not picked up by the other extension, the extension of the user who activated Park is shown in the STN field of the SMDR record for the call.
  • Page 696 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Page 647 Service Observing In Release 6.1 and later systems, SMDR reports do not record the activity of the Service Observer extension for Service Observing calls. Speed Dial When Personal Speed Dial or System Speed Dial is used to dial an outgoing call, the actual digits dialed by the system appear on the report.

  • Page 697: System Access/Intercom Buttons

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features System Access/Intercom Buttons Page 648 System Access/Intercom Buttons At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, DLC operators, data users Reports Affected Extension Information Modes SA buttons Hybrid/PBX ICOM buttons Key and Behind Switch...
  • Page 698 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features System Access/Intercom Buttons Page 649 At a Glance - Continued Factory Settings Button Assignments by Mode Hybrid/PBX Key and Behind Switch Direct-Line Consoles 1 SA Ring 1 ICOM Ring 1 SA Voice 1 ICOM Voice...
  • Page 699 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features System Access/Intercom Buttons Page 650 cannot be made to single-line telephones, a call made on this button to a single-line telephone is a ringing call, even if the single-line telephone has a speakerphone.
  • Page 700 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features System Access/Intercom Buttons Page 651 NOTES: 1. SSA buttons cannot be assigned to single-line telephones or other tip/ring equipment connected to a 016, 012, or 008 OPT module. SSA buttons can be assigned to a tip/ring or external alert device connected either to an MFM in an MLX telephone or to a GPA connected to an analog multiline telephone.
  • Page 701 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features System Access/Intercom Buttons Page 652 In Key mode, the factory setting for Automatic Line Selection (ALS) for multiline telephones is a sequence of outside line buttons. The factory setting for ALS on single-line telephones is an ICOM button.
  • Page 702 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features System Access/Intercom Buttons Page 653 Mode Differences Hybrid/PBX Mode SA buttons, including Shared SA buttons, are available only in Hybrid/PBX mode. Key and Behind Switch Modes ICOM buttons are available only in Key and Behind Switch modes.
  • Page 703 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features System Access/Intercom Buttons Page 654 Data/Video Workstations Shared SA buttons should not be assigned to video workstations. Feature Interactions Auto Answer All When Auto Answer All is activated, incoming calls on SA Ring, ICOM Ring, SA Voice, or ICOM Voice buttons can be answered automatically by the device connected to a General Purpose Adapter (GPA).
  • Page 704 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features System Access/Intercom Buttons Page 655 Calling Restrictions When a call is made on a Shared SA button, the calling restrictions that apply are those programmed for the extension with the button, not those for the principal extension.
  • Page 705 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features System Access/Intercom Buttons Page 656 Group Calling If a delay announcement for a calling group is a principal extension that continued has SSA buttons on other telephones, and if a user uses a corresponding SSA button to join the announcement while a caller is listening to it, the call is removed from the calling group queue and both parties are connected.
  • Page 706 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features System Access/Intercom Buttons Page 657 Night Service Night Service calls override any Ring Timing options (Delay Ring or No Ring) programmed for an SA button and ring immediately. On a Shared SA button, however, Night Service calls follow the programmed option (Immediate Ring, Delay Ring, or No Ring).
  • Page 707 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features System Access/Intercom Buttons Page 658 Saved Number Dial If Saved Number Dial is used on a Shared SA button, the number is stored on the telephone that used the feature, not on the principal extension.

  • Page 708: System Renumbering

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features System Renumbering Page 659 System Renumbering At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators, data users Reports Affected ARS, Dial Plan, Extension Directory, Extension Information, Group Paging, Operator Information, Remote Access (DISA) Information Modes Telephones...
  • Page 709 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features System Renumbering Page 660 NOTE: In Release 6.0 and later systems (Hybrid/PBX mode only) where local users will dial extensions on a remote networked system, UDP procedures are used to number these extensions so that local users can reach these extensions as though they were on the local system.
  • Page 710 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features System Renumbering Page 661 Whenever an extension number is renumbered, the original extension number is available for use. The reserved system-assigned extension numbers (shown in Figures 44, 45, and 46) must be assigned new extension numbers before the original numbers can be used for anything else.

  • Page 711: Digit Numbering Plan

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features System Renumbering Page 662 Operator Console (not flexible) 0 Extensions 10–19 Extensions 20–29 Extensions 30–39 Extensions 40–49 Extensions 50–59 Extensions Extra Extensions Extra MFMs/ Terminal Adapters 60–66 6700–6842 6843–6849...

  • Page 712: Digit Numbering Plan

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features System Renumbering Page 663 MFM adjunct is the extension number assigned to the MLX telephone, increased by 150. For example, if the extension number assigned to an MLX telephone is 6700, the extension number for the MFM adjunct on that telephone is 6850.
  • Page 713 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features System Renumbering Page 664 NOTE: Extension numbers 0 and 100 both refer to the same operator position in the 3-digit numbering plan. Extensions default to 3-digit extension numbers beginning with 100 and ending with 299.

  • Page 714: Set Up Space Numbering Plan

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features System Renumbering Page 665 The extension numbers (7300–7499) shown for adjuncts are reserved for MLX extension jacks. These numbers are automatically assigned by the system to adjuncts connected to MLX telephones either using MFMs (such as modems, answering machines, or fax machines) or directly (for example, a terminal adapter).

  • Page 715: Renumbering Extensions

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features System Renumbering Page 666 Renumbering Extensions and Lines/Trunks Table 43 gives a brief overview of the extensions and lines/trunks that can or cannot be renumbered and lists their factory settings. Single Renumbering Single Renumbering should be used whenever the extension numbers you are changing to or from are not sequential.
  • Page 716 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features System Renumbering Page 667 In Release 1.1 and later systems, the system is not forced idle when renumbering extensions, ARS access code, calling groups, Idle Line access code, LDN, paging groups, park zones, pools, and remote access code.
  • Page 717 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features System Renumbering Page 668 starting with the highest extension number should be assigned to Page 3. You cannot program individual buttons on a DSS. Operator park zones must be included in the extension number range specified for one of the Page buttons.
  • Page 718 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features System Renumbering Page 669 Considerations and Constraints Extensions do not need to be renumbered in the following cases: The default 2-digit extension numbers are acceptable. No special extension numbers are needed. There are fewer than 50 extensions in the system.

  • Page 719: Timed Flash

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features System Renumbering Page 670 Integrated System renumbering can be done only through system programming on Administration the programming console or with SPM. Integrated Administration never sends system numbering information to the system. Ringing/Idle Line In Key and Behind Switch modes, the Idle Line Access code (factory Preference...

  • Page 720: Tandem Switching

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Tandem Switching Page 671 Tandem Switching At a Glance Users Affected Reports Affected General Trunk Information, Extension Information Modes Hybrid/PBX Telephones System Programming Specify the switch type for a PRI tandem trunk connected to a slot in the control unit: Dial slot no.
  • Page 721 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Tandem Switching Page 672 At a Glance - Continued Factory Settings Switch Identifier No value; facility not networked PRI Tandem Trunks* Network Service Electronic Tandem Network (ETN) Routing Route directly to UDP Copy Telephone No.
  • Page 722 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Tandem Switching Page 673 This section describes how line/trunk operations are set up and used for optimal cost savings and functionality across private networks, including the following topics: Switch identifiers ARS access to lines/trunks on remote networked systems...
  • Page 723 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Tandem Switching Page 674 Shared Applications. Networked systems should have their own local voice mail and/or auto attendant applications as well as their own external alerts and Music On Hold sources. However, a single auto attendant can distribute calls throughout the network.
  • Page 724 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Tandem Switching Page 675 A switch identifier should be unique across a network. This helps avoid a situation called automatic immediate cycling . For example, when the switch identifiers for the incoming trunks and the automatically selected outgoing trunks for a call match indicating the tandem call would return to the originating switch, another route for the call is selected if possible.
  • Page 725 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Tandem Switching Page 676 Network Calls Routed via the Local System. This topic explains the factors that you must consider when remote users, calling via ARS from a networked system, use public switched telephone network facilities connected to your own local system and/or have calls routed through your system to another system where they are sent to the PSTN.
  • Page 726 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Tandem Switching Page 677 these calls can be routed across the network to another system’s public switched telephone network PSTN trunks. For equal access calls, the system automatically prepends the local ARS access code, which must match the ARS code of the non-local system.
  • Page 727 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Tandem Switching Page 678 for all others). See “Restrictions” on page 78 in the ARS topic and “Uniform 710. For more information refer to Network Dial Plan Features” on page Reference .
  • Page 728 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Tandem Switching Page 679 SECURITYlALERT: Networked systems require special attention to security issues. Follow the rules below when setting up and planning your system for network use. Ensure that barrier codes are required for incoming remote access calls received on PSTN PRI dial-plan routed and DID facilities, as well as those calls that are made from the local system by dialing...
  • Page 729 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Tandem Switching Page 680 — This setting determines whether local and/or toll calls are allowed. The factory setting is outward- and toll-restricted. To allow call routing to the PSTN or to another system in the network, this setting should be changed to unrestricted, allowing the routing of all such calls.
  • Page 730 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Tandem Switching Page 681 Automatic Route In Release 6.0 and later systems (Hybrid/PBX mode only), the ARS Selection access code is accepted over private networked trunks, allowing users in a local system to make calls from lines/trunks connected to a remote system.
  • Page 731 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Tandem Switching Page 682 Night Service In Release 6.0 and later systems (Hybrid/PBX mode only), if Night Service is programmed with outward restriction, the restriction does not apply to non-local dial plan calls.
  • Page 732 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Tandem Switching Page 683 Primary Rate Interface In Release 6.0 and later systems (Hybrid/PBX mode only), PRI and T1 (PRI) and T1 (emulated tie voice or data tie) facilities can be private tandem trunks. To provide the facility, customers order a point-to-point T1 circuit from a service provider and use system programming to set it up for PRI or T1, but the provider only supplies amplification, not switching services.

  • Page 733: Timer

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Timer Page 684 Timer At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators Reports Affected None Modes Telephones MLX display and analog multiline telephone users MLX Display Label Description Each MLX telephone and analog multiline display telephone has a timer to time calls, meetings, breaks, or other events.

  • Page 734: Toll Type

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Toll Type Page 685 Toll Type At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators, data users Reports Affected General Trunk Information Modes Telephone System Programming Designate whether or not a toll prefix is required: Factory Setting Toll prefix required Description...
  • Page 735 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Toll Type Page 686 Allowed/ When lines/trunks with different toll types are connected to the system (for Disallowed Lists example, basic lines/trunks and PRI facilities), a toll prefix ( or ) may be required for toll calls on some lines/trunks but not on others.

  • Page 736: Touch-Tone Or Rotary Signaling

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Touch-Tone or Rotary Signaling Page 687 Touch-Tone or Rotary Signaling At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators Reports Affected DID Trunk Information, GS/LS Trunk Information, System Information ( ), Tie Trunk Information Modes...
  • Page 737 IS III Fax Attendant MERLIN MAIL MERLIN LEGEND Mail Messaging 2000 Enhanced Service Center (ESC) Lucent Technologies Attendant Intuity CONVERSANT Intuity AUDIX Message-Waiting light updating for Centralized Voice Messaging when the updating codes are sent over tandem tie or T1-emulated tandem tie trunks (Release 6.1 or later systems, Hybrid/PBX mode only)

  • Page 738: System Requirements For Ttrs

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Touch-Tone or Rotary Signaling Page 689 Table 44 is based on the assumption that the system already has basic telephones, remote access, and tie trunks. Table 44. System Requirements for TTRs TTRs Required Calls per Hour...

  • Page 739: Ttrs Required For Primary Delay Announcement Devices When Using Prompt-Based Overflow

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Touch-Tone or Rotary Signaling Page 690 Table 46. TTRs Required for Primary Delay Announcement Devices When Using Prompt-Based Overflow No. of Devices No. of TTRs Required 8 or more Table 47.

  • Page 740: Modules With Ttrs

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Touch-Tone or Rotary Signaling Page 691 Calculate the number of TTRs required by the voice messaging system(s) (see Table 45). Calculate the number of TTRs needed for delay announcement devices, both primary and secondary (see Table 46 Table...
  • Page 741 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Touch-Tone or Rotary Signaling Page 692 Rotary signaling can be set for Delay or No Delay. Delay is the factory setting; it makes the rotary pulse inaudible to the telephone user and delays sending the dialed number from the control unit to the line/trunk until the user is finished dialing.

  • Page 742: Transfer

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Transfer Page 693 Transfer At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators Reports Affected Operator Information, SMDR, System Information Modes Telephones (Behind Switch mode only) Programming Code MLX Display Label System Programming To program the Transfer button in Behind Switch mode:...
  • Page 743 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Transfer Page 694 Description Users can transfer inside or outside calls either to inside extensions or to outside numbers. Transferring an outside call to an outside number is called trunk-to-trunk transfer .
  • Page 744 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Transfer Page 695 Transfer Return Time If a transferred call is unanswered within a programmed number of rings, it rings back at the transfer originator’s telephone. This transfer return time can be set to a value of 1 to 9 rings, or 0 (the factory setting is 4 rings).
  • Page 745 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Transfer Page 696 With one-touch Transfer, the system is also programmed to complete transfers in one of the following ways: Automatic Completion (factory setting). A transfer is completed automatically as soon as the Auto Dial or DSS button is pressed.
  • Page 746 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Transfer Page 697 NOTE: In Release 6.0 and later systems (Hybrid/PBX mode only), voice- announced transfer should not be programmed, because calls to non-local dial plan extensions cannot be voice-announced. If the system is programmed to select a ring button and one is available, the call rings at the destination extension.
  • Page 747 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Transfer Page 698 Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Trunk-to-trunk transfer (a call transferred to an outside number) is not allowed when the line/trunk with the incoming call is a loop-start line that is not programmed for reliable disconnect.
  • Page 748 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Transfer Page 699 Without Consultation. A transfer without consultation can be made either to an inside extension or to an outside number. The user initiating the transfer completes the transfer before the person at the destination extension or number answers.
  • Page 749 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Transfer Page 700 When you try to complete a transfer to an outside number under the following conditions, the call to the outside destination is disconnected: The outside line that the incoming call is using is a loop-start line programmed for unreliable disconnect.
  • Page 750 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Transfer Page 701 Mode Differences Behind Switch Mode In Behind Switch mode, when the fixed Transfer button is pressed, the Transfer feature of the host switch is used instead of the system’s Transfer feature. However, to activate Transfer, the fixed Transfer button on an MLX or analog multiline telephone must be programmed through system programming to send a timed flash plus the code expected by the host.
  • Page 751 The call is transferred. If a single-line telephone with positive or timed disconnect is used—for example, Lucent Technologies models 2500YMGL and 2500MMGK—pressing the switchhook disconnects the call. With this type of telephone, the Recall button must be used instead of the switchhook to transfer a call.
  • Page 752 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Transfer Page 703 Caller ID If a call comes in over a line connected to an 800 GS/LS-ID module and the customer subscribes to Caller ID service (loop-start lines only), when the call is transferred, the caller’s telephone number is shown on Line 1 of the first screen.
  • Page 753 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Transfer Page 704 CTI Link CTI link applications can control inside transfers, not transfers to outside numbers. When a CTI application is used to initiate a transfer, caller information is passed to a screen-pop-capable destination.
  • Page 754 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Transfer Page 705 Display When an MLX display telephone user makes a voice-announced transfer, continued the display on his or her telephone shows . After the transfer is completed, the user’s display shows When an MLX display telephone user does not complete a transfer (for example because Do Not Disturb is on at the destination extension), the...
  • Page 755 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Transfer Page 706 Hold Calls on hold for transfer are timed so that a user or system operator continued hears a reminder after the timer expires. In Release 2.1 and later systems, a call that has been put on hold at a Cover, SA, Shared SA, or Pool button can be accessed by a user who has a personal line button for the call.
  • Page 756 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Transfer Page 707 Music On Hold An outside caller hears Music On Hold if it is programmed as the transfer audible. Music is played only before the transfer is completed by the originating extension.
  • Page 757 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Transfer Page 708 Service Observing In Release 6.1 and later systems, a Service Observer cannot transfer observed calls. If an observed extension transfers a call, the Service Observer is dropped from the call when the transfer is initiated and when it is completed, but the Service Observing session remains active.
  • Page 758 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Transfer Page 709 System Access/ A transferred call that returns to the principal extension does not ring on Intercom Buttons any corresponding Shared SA buttons. If a transfer originator has an SSA continued button for the person receiving the transfer, the LED next to the SSA button flashes to indicate a ringing call.

  • Page 759: Uniform Dial Plan Features

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Uniform Dial Plan Features Page 710 Uniform Dial Plan Features At a Glance Users Affected Reports Affected Non-Local Dial Plan, Extension Information Modes Hybrid/PBX Telephones System Programming Assign extension number ranges for non-local dial plan extensions: Dial no.
  • Page 760 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Uniform Dial Plan Features Page 711 At a Glance - Continued System Programming continued When SMDR is set to record both incoming and outgoing calls, specify how private networked trunk calls should be recorded (for Release 6.1 and later systems): More Dial line/trunk no.
  • Page 761 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Uniform Dial Plan Features Page 712 Details of UDP routing for intersystem and other routed calls Feature interactions across private networks “Tandem Switching” on page 671 describes additional features of private networks, including the following topics: Switch identifiers...
  • Page 762 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Uniform Dial Plan Features Page 713 NOTE: In earlier releases, prior to 6.0, intersystem calls were made by dialing a pool access code followed by the extension number. With Release 6.0 and later systems, a reference list is programmed on the local system to find non-local extensions and direct calls to them.
  • Page 763 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Uniform Dial Plan Features Page 714 Extensions included in ranges must be unique and unambiguous across systems. In other words, if the local system includes extension 112 , that system blocks the programming of a non-local extension range that encompasses extension 1122 .
  • Page 764 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Uniform Dial Plan Features Page 715 LEGEND Communications System, this method of routing should be used. However, DID facilities should be connected directly to the local DEFINITY ECS or DEFINITY ProLogix Solutions systems.
  • Page 765 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Uniform Dial Plan Features Page 716 when, for example, an extension user is working at home and wants to receive calls at a home telephone number. Transfers with consultation can be made across the network, but they cannot be voice-announced.
  • Page 766 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Uniform Dial Plan Features Page 717 In Release 6.0 and later systems, T1 channels can be programmed either to emulate voice tie trunks or data tie trunks. These can be used as tandem trunks linking networked systems.
  • Page 767 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Uniform Dial Plan Features Page 718 Feature Interactions Account Code Entry Account codes entered on the local system are reported by SMDR. Users can enter account codes for private network calls. When Forced Account Code Entry is programmed, a user can still dial a non-local extension without entering an account code.
  • Page 768 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Uniform Dial Plan Features Page 719 Centralized Voice In Release 6.1 and later systems (Hybrid/PBX only), the non-local Messaging integrated VMI calling group cannot be dialed directly. The local calling group that contains the non-local extension for the integrated VMI calling group is dialed instead.
  • Page 769 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Uniform Dial Plan Features Page 720 CTI Link For an incoming PSTN call that enters the private network on a PRI trunk continued with an ANI of length shorter than seven digits and crosses PRI tandem trunks only, the recipient PassageWay Telephony Services client display depends on the PassageWay Telephony Services application implementation.
  • Page 770 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Uniform Dial Plan Features Page 721 Display Display operation for Forwarding, redirected transfers, and returned continued transfers are generally not supported across a private network. When a call is transferred and travels over PRI tandem trunks, the display shows the transferring extension.
  • Page 771 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Uniform Dial Plan Features Page 722 Messaging Messaging features generally do not work across a private network. They only work for extensions connected to the same system. A user cannot turn a message light at a non-local dial plan extension off or on.
  • Page 772 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Uniform Dial Plan Features Page 723 Reminder Service Reminder Service does not function across a private network. Service Observing In Release 6.1 and later systems, calls coming across a private network can be observed just like outside calls.
  • Page 773 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Uniform Dial Plan Features Page 724 Transfer Local users can make the types of calls listed below, regardless of system continued programming for trunk-to-trunk transfers: A call on a private network trunk transferred to a non-local dial plan extension A call on an outside central office line/trunk transferred to a non- local dial plan extension...

  • Page 774: Voice Announce To Busy

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Voice Announce to Busy Page 725 Voice Announce to Busy At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, DLC operators Reports Affected Extension Directory, Extension Information Modes Telephones All except single-line telephones Programming Codes...
  • Page 775 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Voice Announce to Busy Page 726 higher even-numbered jack is used for voice announcements and cannot be dialed. A single-line telephone cannot receive voice-announced calls even if the set has a speakerphone.
  • Page 776 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Voice Announce to Busy Page 727 QCCs cannot receive Voice Announce calls. Any call to a QCC from a Voice Announce SA button from another extension is received at the QCC as a ringing call.

  • Page 777: Volume

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features Volume Page 728 Volume At a Glance Users Affected Telephone users, operators Modes Telephones MLX telephones Description The Volume button on the MLX-5, MLX-5D, MLX-10, MLX-10D, MLX-10DP, MLX- 16DP, MLX-20L, and MLX-28D telephones controls the volume levels for ringing, conversations on the handset, and conversations on the speakerphone.

  • Page 778: A Customer Support Information

    In the USA only, Lucent Technologies provides a toll-tree customer Helpline (1 800 628-2888) 24 hours a day. If you need assistance when installing, programming, or using your system, call the Helpline or your Lucent Technologies representative. Consultation charges may apply.

  • Page 779: Canadian Department Of Communications (Doc) Interference Information

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Customer Support Information Canadian Department of Communications (DOC) Interference Information Page A-2 Canadian Department of Communications (DOC) Interference Information This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions set out in the radio interference regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications.

  • Page 780: Installation And Operational Procedures

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Customer Support Information Installation and Operational Procedures Page A-3  The REN (Ringer Equivalence Number) for all three systems is 1.5A. — The facility interface code (FIC) and service order code (SOC): ...
  • Page 781 Page A-4 event repairs are needed on this equipment, contact your authorized Lucent Technologies dealer or, in the USA only, contact the National Service Assistance Center (NSAC) at 1 800 628-2888. Rights of the Local Telephone Company. If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the local telephone company may discontinue your service temporarily.

  • Page 782: Doc Notification And Repair Information

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Customer Support Information DOC Notification and Repair Information Page A-5 Equal Access Codes. This equipment is capable of providing users access to interstate providers of operator services through the use of access codes. Modifications of this equipment by call aggregators to block access dialing codes is a violation of the Telephone Operator Consumers Act of 1990.

  • Page 783: Renseignements Sur La Notification Du Ministère Des Communications

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Customer Support Information Renseignements sur la notification du ministère des Communications Page A-6 Renseignements sur la notification du ministère des Communications AVIS: L’étiquette du ministère des Communications du Canada identifie le matériel homologué.
  • Page 784 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Customer Support Information Renseignements sur la notification du ministère des Communications Page A-7 No d’homologation: 230 4095A No de certification: CSA LR 56260 L’indice de charge: 6 MERLIN LEGEND D.O.C.

  • Page 785: Security Of Your System: Preventing Toll Fraud

    Lucent Technologies cannot be responsible for such charges and will not make any allowance or give any credit...

  • Page 786: Toll Fraud Prevention

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Customer Support Information Toll Fraud Prevention Page A-9 To minimize the risk of unauthorized access to your communications system: Use an unpublished Remote Access number. Assign access codes randomly to users on a need-to-have basis, keeping a log of all authorized users and assigning one code to one person.
  • Page 787 . In any event, it is not advisable to give anyone access to network facilities or operators, or to dial a number at the request of the caller. Any time a call appears to be suspicious, call the Lucent Technologies BCS Fraud Intervention Center at 1 800 628-2888 (fraud intervention for System ®...
  • Page 788 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Customer Support Information Toll Fraud Prevention Page A-11 Customers should also take advantage of Lucent Technologies monitoring services and devices, such as the NetPROTECT family of ® fraud-detection services, CAS with HackerTracker , and CAT Terminal with Watchdog.
  • Page 789 1809, 1900, and 976 or 1(wildcard)976. In Release 3.1 and later systems, Disallowed List number 7 does not include 800 and 1800 and 411 and 1411, but Lucent Technologies recommends that you add them. Assign all voice mail port extensions to this Disallowed List. Lucent Technologies recommends assigning Disallowed List number 7.
  • Page 790 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Customer Support Information Toll Fraud Prevention Page A-13 Security Risks Associated with the Automated Attendant Feature of Voice Messaging Systems Two areas of toll fraud risk associated with the Automated Attendant feature of voice messaging systems are the following: Pooled facility (line/trunk) access codes are translated to a menu prompt to allow Remote Access.
  • Page 791 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Customer Support Information Toll Fraud Prevention Page A-14 the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System. The MERLIN MAIL MERLIN and MERLIN LEGEND MAIL Automated Attendant feature merely accesses the RCF feature in the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System.

  • Page 792: Other Security Hints

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Customer Support Information Other Security Hints Page A-15 Other Security Hints Make sure that the Automated Attendant Selector Codes do not permit outside line selection. Following are a number of measures and guidelines that can help you ensure the security of your communications system and voice messaging system.
  • Page 793 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Customer Support Information Other Security Hints Page A-16 Educating Operators Operators or attendants need to be especially aware of how to recognize and react to potential hacker activity. To defend against toll fraud, operators should follow the guidelines below: Establish procedures to counter social engineering .
  • Page 794 Change the access password regularly and issue it only to authorized personnel. Disconnect the maintenance port when not in use. (However, this eliminates Lucent Technologies’ 24-hour maintenance surveillance capability and may result in additional maintenance costs.) Create a communications system management policy concerning employee turnover and include these suggestions: —...

  • Page 795: Limited Warranty And Limitation Of Liability

    Warranty Date that your system is not in good working order, Lucent Technologies will without charge to you repair or replace, at its option, the system components that are not in good working order. Repair or replacement parts may be new or refurbished and will be provided on an exchange basis.
  • Page 796 PURPOSE. Limitation of Liability Except as provided below, the liability of Lucent Technologies and its affiliates and suppliers for any claims, losses, damages, or expenses from any cause whatsoever (including acts or omissions of third parties), regardless of the form of action, whether in contract, tort, or otherwise, shall not exceed the lesser of: (1) the direct damages proven;...

  • Page 797: Remote Administration And Maintenance

    Customer Support Information Remote Administration and Maintenance Page A-20 Lucent Technologies’s liability shall be limited to proven damages to person. No action or proceeding against Lucent Technologies or its affiliates or suppliers may be commenced more than twenty-four (24) months after the cause of action accrues.
  • Page 798 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Customer Support Information Remote Administration and Maintenance Page A-21 — Keep the Remote Administration and Maintenance telephone number secret. Give it only to people who need to know it, and impress upon them the need to keep it a secret.
  • Page 799 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Customer Support Information Remote Administration and Maintenance Page A-22...

  • Page 800: B Features And Planning Forms

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features and Planning Forms Page B-1 Features and Planning Forms This appendix contains an alphabetical list of the features that can be assigned to the system or system extensions and the planning forms associated with each feature.
  • Page 801 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features and Planning Forms Page B-2 Feature Planning Forms Allowed/Disallowed Lists 3a—Incoming Trunks: Remote Access 4b—Analog Multiline Telephone 4d—MLX Telephone 4e—MFM Adjunct: MLX Telephone 4f—Tip/Ring Equipment 5a—Direct-Line Console (DLC): Analog 5b—Direct-Line Console (DLC): Digital 5c—MFM Adjunct: DLC 5d—Queued Call Console (QCC)
  • Page 802 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features and Planning Forms Page B-3 Feature Planning Forms Automatic Route Selection 3e—Automatic Route Selection Worksheet (Facility Restriction Level) 3f—Automatic Route Selection Tables continued 3g—Automatic Route Selection Default and Special Numbers Tables Data Form 1a—Modem Data Station Data Form 1b—ISDN Terminal Adapter Data Station...
  • Page 803 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features and Planning Forms Page B-4 Feature Planning Forms Centrex Operation 1—System Planning Button diagrams on all appropriate telephone forms Conference 1—System Planning Button diagrams on all appropriate telephone forms Coverage 4b—Analog Multiline Telephone 4d—MLX Telephone...
  • Page 804 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features and Planning Forms Page B-5 Feature Planning Forms Forward and Follow Me 4b—Analog Multiline Telephone (Remote Call Forward) 4d—MLX Telephone 4e—MFM Adjunct: MLX Telephone 4f—Tip/Ring Equipment 5a—Direct-Line Console (DLC): Analog 5b—Direct-Line Console (DLC): Digital 5c—MFM Adjunct: DLC...
  • Page 805 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features and Planning Forms Page B-6 Feature Planning Forms Labeling 2a—System Numbering: Extension Jacks 2c—System Numbering: Line/Trunk Jacks 2d—System Numbering: Special Renumbers 10a—Label Form: Posted Message 10b—System Speed Dial Language Choice 1—System Planning 4d—MLX Telephone...
  • Page 806 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features and Planning Forms Page B-7 Feature Planning Forms Notify (see Signal/Notify, page B–9) Paging 2c—System Numbering: Line/Trunk Jacks 2d—System Numbering: Special Renumbers 4b—Analog Multiline Telephone 4d—MLX Telephone 4e—MFM Adjunct: MLX Telephone 4f—Tip/Ring Equipment 5a—Direct-Line Console (DLC): Analog...
  • Page 807 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features and Planning Forms Page B-8 Feature Planning Forms Pools 2c—System Numbering: Line/Trunk Jacks 2d—System Numbering: Special Renumbers 4b—Analog Multiline Telephone 4d—MLX Telephone 4e—MFM Adjunct: MLX Telephone 4f—Tip/Ring Equipment 5a—Direct-Line Console (DLC): Analog 5b—Direct-Line Console (DLC): Digital...
  • Page 808 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features and Planning Forms Page B-9 Feature Planning Forms Ringing/Idle Line Preference (see Automatic Line Selection and Ringing/Idle Line Preference, page B–2) Ringing Options 4b—Analog Multiline Telephone 4d—MLX Telephone 4e—MFM Adjunct: MLX Telephone 5a—Direct-Line Console (DLC): Analog...
  • Page 809 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Features and Planning Forms Page B-10 Feature Planning Forms Transfer 1—System Planning 6a—Optional Operator Features 8a—System Features Button diagrams on all appropriate telephone forms Uniform Dial Plan (UDP) Refer to Non-Local UDP Administration Form in the Installation Routing Specification...

  • Page 810: C System Features

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 System Features Page C-1 System Features This appendix provides an alphabetical list of systemwide features and outlines their availability by mode. Notes, where appropriate, briefly describe mode differences and specific release availability.
  • Page 811 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 System Features Page C-2 Availability by Mode Hybrid/ Behind Feature Switch Notes Caller ID Release 3.0 and later. Requires 800 GS/LS-ID module and subscriber service from central office.
  • Page 812 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 System Features Page C-3 Availability by Mode Hybrid/ Behind Feature Switch Notes Hold Disconnect Interval HotLine Inside Dial Tone Labeling Language Choice Release 1.1 and later Line/Trunk Options Loudspeaker Paging Microphone Disable Night Service...
  • Page 813 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 System Features Page C-4 Availability by Mode Hybrid/ Behind Feature Switch Notes T1 trunks Switched 56 data supported in Release 4.0 and later Tie Trunk Options Timed Flash ( Recall/Timed Flash ) Release 2.0 and later Toll Type Touch-Tone or Rotary Signaling...

  • Page 814: D General Feature Use And Telephone Programming

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 General Feature Use and Telephone Programming General Feature Use Information Page D-1 General Feature Use and Telephone Programming This appendix contains information on the general use of features for the MLX, analog multiline, and single-line telephones.
  • Page 815 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 General Feature Use and Telephone Programming General Feature Use Information Page D-2 Some features, such as Auto Dial, must be programmed onto line buttons in order to function. Other features, such as Privacy, are best used if programmed onto line buttons—the LED next to the line button provides visual indication that the feature is in use.

  • Page 816: Telephone And Operator Features

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 General Feature Use and Telephone Programming Telephone and Operator Features Page D-3 NOTE: Queued Call Console (QCC) system operators cannot use feature codes. The following features can be used only by dialing feature codes: Pickup Forward/Follow Me—Cancel One Forward/Follow Me—Cancel All...

  • Page 817: Telephone And Operator Features

    Table 49. Telephone and Operator Features 2-Line MLX-10 MLX-28 MLX- MLX- Single- Analog Feature Prog Code Feature Code Display 7-Line Display D/5D 10/5 Line Multi. K P B K P B K P B K P B K P B '!ÃÃ...
  • Page 818 2-Line MLX-10 MLX-28 MLX- MLX- Single- Analog Feature Prog Code Feature Code Display 7-Line Display D/5D 10/5 Line Multi. Call Waiting K P B K P B K P B K P B K P B K P B '& Call Waiting Pickup &&! &&!
  • Page 819 2-Line MLX-10 MLX-28 MLX- MLX- Single- Analog Feature Prog Code Feature Code Display 7-Line Display D/5D 10/5 Line Multi. Extension Status Direct-Line Console Status Off &% &% + DSS K P B K P B K P B button Status 1 &% &% + DSS...
  • Page 820 2-Line MLX-10 MLX-28 MLX- MLX- Single- Analog Feature Prog Code Feature Code Display 7-Line Display D/5D 10/5 Line Multi. Group Calling !!Ã + calling ln-Queue Alarm K P B K P B K P B K P B K P B group ext.
  • Page 821 2-Line MLX-10 MLX-28 MLX- MLX- Single- Analog Feature Prog Code Feature Code Display 7-Line Display D/5D 10/5 Line Multi. Intercom buttons Assign buttons ICOM (Default Ring) ICOM Originate Only Change button type  ( Ring Voice Language Choice K P B K P B K P B K P B...
  • Page 822 2-Line MLX-10 MLX-28 MLX- MLX- Single- Analog Feature Prog Code Feature Code Display 7-Line Display D/5D 10/5 Line Multi. "( "( Night Service K P B K P B K P B Notify K P B K P B K P B K P B K P B &$&...
  • Page 823 2-Line MLX-10 MLX-28 MLX- MLX- Single- Analog Feature Prog Code Feature Code Display 7-Line Display D/5D 10/5 Line Multi. Reminder Service K P B K P B K P B K P B K P B K P B + time + Ã...
  • Page 824 2-Line MLX-10 MLX-28 MLX- MLX- Single- Analog Feature Prog Code Feature Code Display 7-Line Display D/5D 10/5 Line Multi. Saved Number Dial K P B K P B K P B K P B K P B "' "' + ext. no. Send/Remove K P B K P B...

  • Page 825: Telephone Programming

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 General Feature Use and Telephone Programming Telephone Programming Page D-12 Telephone Programming The following describes how to program features on MLX and analog multiline telephones. Because Personal Speed Dial is the only feature that single-line telephone users can program, general programming instructions for single-line telephones are not provided.

  • Page 826: Programming Analog Multiline Telephones

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 General Feature Use and Telephone Programming Telephone Programming Page D-13 Table 50. Programming Analog Multiline Telephones Step Action Label the button. Remove the clear label cover from the phone: insert the end of a paper clip in the notch at the top of the Note: Skip this step if the feature cover.

  • Page 827: Programming Mlx Telephones Using The Display

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 General Feature Use and Telephone Programming Telephone Programming Page D-14 Table 52. Programming MLX Telephones Using the Display Step Action Label the button to be Remove the clear label cover from the telephone by programmed.
  • Page 828 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 General Feature Use and Telephone Programming Telephone Programming Page D-15 Table 52. Continued Step Action Select the feature. If the feature name is on the Press the button next to or below the name of the display: feature to be programmed.

  • Page 829: Programming Mdc 9000 And Mdw 9000 Telephones

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 General Feature Use and Telephone Programming Telephone Programming Page D-16 Table 53. Programming MDC 9000 and MDW 9000 Telephones Step Action Label the button to be Remove the clear label cover from the telephone by programmed.

  • Page 830: E System Programming Menu Hierarchy

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 System Programming Menu Hierarchy Page E-1 System Programming Menu Hierarchy The system programming menu hierarchy details the sequence of menu screens that appear when you select the system programming options. The choice of an option on the first menu screen leads to either a second menu screen or a data-entry screen.

  • Page 831: Feature Reference 555-661-110 August

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 System Programming Menu Hierarchy Page E-2...

  • Page 832: F Sample Reports

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Sample Reports Page F-1 Sample Reports This appendix includes samples of the print reports generated by the communications system. Table 54 lists the system reports and the pages in this appendix where samples can be found.

  • Page 833: F Sample Reports

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Sample Reports Page F-2 Table 54. Continued For... See... Remote Access (DISA) Information Report Operator Information Report Allowed Lists Report Access to Allowed Lists Report Disallowed Lists Report Access to Disallowed Lists Report Automatic Route Selection Report Extension Directory Report...
  • Page 834 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Sample Reports Page F-3 Table 55. System Reports Menu Option Report Name Description Prints each of the reports available on the Print menu, from Note: With selected, four trunk information reports automatically print.
  • Page 835 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Sample Reports Page F-4 Table 55. Continued Menu Option Report Name Description Access to Allowed Lists Lists are numbered 0–7. If the Allowed List is assigned to Remote Access users and barrier codes are used, the barrier codes are numbered 0–16.
  • Page 836 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Sample Reports Page F-5 Table 55. Continued Menu Option Report Name Description Extension Information For each specified station (extension), type of equipment connected, features assigned, ESS supervisor status, and features assigned to each button.

  • Page 837: System Information Report

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Sample Reports System Information Report Page F-6 System Information Report Print Menu Option: SYSTEM INFORMATION Current Date: 01/04/00 Current Time: 00:21:15 System : Mode AutoMaintBusy AutoBusyTie Hybrid/PBX Disable Disable Language:...

  • Page 838: Dial Plan Report

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Sample Reports Dial Plan Report Page F-7 System Information Report— Continued Slot # 1: 008 MLX Slot # 2: Slot # 3: Slot # 4: Slot # 5: 800 GS/LS Slot # 6: 008 GS/LS-MLX...
  • Page 839 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Sample Reports Dial Plan Report Page F-8 DGCG DGCG DGCG DGCG # 32: 7929 DIAL PLAN FOR LINES/TRUNKS LINE # OUTSIDE LINE # 2: OUTSIDE LINE # OUTSIDE LINE # 4: OUTSIDE...
  • Page 840 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Sample Reports Dial Plan Report Page F-9 Dial Plan Report—Continued DIAL PLAN FOR STATIONS STN #: OPERATR STN #: STN #: STN #: EXT 13 STN #: EXT 14 STN #: STN #:...

  • Page 841: Non-Local Dial Plan Report

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Sample Reports Non-Local Dial Plan Report Page F-10 Dial Plan Report—Continued COMPLETE DIAL PLAN FOR STATIONS AND ADJUNCTS ID #: 4000 7300 ID #: 4001 7301 ID #: 4002 7302 ID #:...

  • Page 842: Label Information Report

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Sample Reports Label Information Report Page F-11 04) 2570-2589 17) 5100-5199 30) 7060-7099 8100-8199 05) 2590-2609 18) 5200-5200 31) 7100-7119 8200-8229 06) 2610-2649 19) 5201-5202 32) 7220-7449 8230-8259 07) 2650-2679 20) 5203-5204...

  • Page 843: Tie Trunk Information Report

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Sample Reports Tie Trunk Information Report Page F-12 DO NOT DISTURB OUT TO LUNCH AT HOME OUT SICK IN A MEETING IN CONFERENCE WITH A CLIENT WITH A CUSTOMER AWAY FROM DESK OUT ALL DAY CUSTM MSG11...

  • Page 844: Gs/Ls Trunk Information Report

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Sample Reports GS/LS Trunk Information Report Page F-13 Trk SS/PP Blk DiscTime Type ExpDig DelDig AddDig Signal InvDest 841 13/ 1 500ms Wink TouchTone BkupExt 842 13/ 2 500ms Wink TouchTone BkupExt...

  • Page 845: Ds1 Information Report

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Sample Reports DS1 Information Report Page F-14 806 4/ 2 No Remote Long 807 4/ 3 No Remote Long 808 4/ 4 No Remote Long 809 5/ 1 No Remote Long 810 5/ 2...
  • Page 846 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Sample Reports PRI Information Report Page F-15...
  • Page 847 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Sample Reports PRI Information Report Page F-16 PRI Information Report—Continued BchnlGrp #: Slot: TestTelNum: NtwkServ: Incoming Routing: ElecTandNtwkRoute Directly to UDP Channel ID: 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Line PhoneNumber...
  • Page 848 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Sample Reports PRI Information Report Page F-17 PRI Information Report—Continued Network Selection Table Entry Number: Pattern to Match: 101**** 10*** Special Service Table Entry Number: Pattern to Match: Operator: none OP/P...

  • Page 849: Remote Access (Disa) Information Report

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Sample Reports Remote Access (DISA) Information Report Page F-18 PRI Information Report—Continued Pattern Call Type: BOTH BOTH BOTH BOTH BOTH NtwkServ: DMS-Private DMS-Private DeleteDigits: 0 Entry Number: 5 Call Type: BOTH BOTH...

  • Page 850: Operator Information Report

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Sample Reports Operator Information Report Page F-19 Sections: General Options; System Default Class of Restrictions (Non-TIE); System Default Class of Restrictions (TIE); Barrier Code Administration GENERAL OPTIONS (ACCESS CODE 889) Barrier Code required for Non-TIE DISA lines Barrier Code required for TIE DISA lines Automatic Queuing enabled for DISA lines...
  • Page 851 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Sample Reports Operator Information Report Page F-20 OPERATOR POSITIONS PORT CALL ALERT ADDR. EXT # LABEL TYPE (QCC ONLY) ==== ===== ======= ==== ========== 1/ 1 OPERATR 1/ 5 EXT 14 2/ 1...

  • Page 852: Allowed Lists Report

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Sample Reports Allowed Lists Report Page F-21 Operator Information Report— Continued QCC CALL TYPES: CALL TYPE PRIORITY OPERATORS ======================= ======== =================== Dial 0 Operator Follow Forward Unassigned DID Listed Directory Number Operator’s Extension Returning...

  • Page 853: Access To Allowed Lists Report

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Sample Reports Access to Allowed Lists Report Page F-22 Entry 2: ------ Entry 3: ------ Entry 4: ------ Entry 5: ------ Entry 6: ------ Entry 7: ------ Entry 8: ------ Entry 9:...

  • Page 854: Access To Disallowed Lists Report

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Sample Reports Access to Disallowed Lists Report Page F-23 Entry 6: ------------ Entry 7: ------------ Entry 8: ------------ Entry 9: ------------ List : Entry 0: ------------ Entry 1: ------------ Entry 2: ------------...

  • Page 855: Extension Directory Report

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Sample Reports Extension Directory Report Page F-24 Pool Absorb Other Digits Call type Start Pattern 1)70-- ------------------- BOTH --:-- 2)---- ------------------- ----- --:-- 3)---- ------------------- ----- --:-- 4)---- ------------------- -----...

  • Page 856: System Directory Report

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Sample Reports System Directory Report Page F-25 2/ 5 OPERATR N Y N N U 3 N 2/ 6 N Y N N U 3 N 2/ 7 N Y N N U 3 N 2/ 8...
  • Page 857 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Sample Reports Extension Information Report Page F-26 Group Coverers : 773 NS Groups : 10 Group Calling Member Pickup Groups Allowed Lists Disallowed Lists Restrictions : UNRESTRICTED ESS Sup.

  • Page 858: Group Coverage Information Report

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Sample Reports Group Coverage Information Report Page F-27 Extension Information Report— Continued EXTENSION INFORMATION Extn SS/PP Type 1/ 1 MLX-20L + 1 DSS Button Blank Status None Button Blank Status None...

  • Page 859: Direct Group Calling Information Report

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Sample Reports Direct Group Calling Information Report Page F-28 Call Distribution Type : CIRCULAR Delay Announcement Ext # : 11 Message Waiting Station : 20 Calls-in-queue Threshold : 1 External Alert ext # : 21 Overflow Threshold (#)

  • Page 860: Night Service Information Report

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Sample Reports Night Service Information Report Page F-29 External Alert ext # : NONE Overflow Threshold (#) Overflow Threshold (Time): 0 Prompt-Based Overflow Option: No Overflow to DGC group # : NONE Group Coverage : Member No.

  • Page 861: Group Call Pickup Report

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Sample Reports Group Call Pickup Report Page F-30 Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Emergency Allowed List: NS Excluded STNS: Group Call Pickup Report Print Menu Option: GROUP CALL PICKUP Group # STNS Group #...

  • Page 862: Authorization Code Information Report

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Sample Reports Authorization Code Information Report Page F-31 SOFTWARE COLD START 00/00 01/04 00:22:11 0003 PRI SVC AUDIT TIMEOUT 00/00 01/08 00:00:53 7001 TIMEOUT COLD START 00/00 02/11 00:04:08 0001 PRI SVC AUDIT TIMEOUT...

  • Page 863: Switch 56 Data Information Report

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Sample Reports Switch 56 Data Information Report Page F-32 908555100401 9085551004 908555100501 9085551005 908555100601 9085551006 908555100701 9085551007 Switch 56 Data Information Report Print Menu Option: Dial Plan Routing for Network Service Expected Digits: Digits to Delete: 0 Digits to Add:...

  • Page 864: G Button Diagrams

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Button Diagrams Page G-1 Button Diagrams This appendix contains the button diagrams for Hybrid/PBX, Key, and Behind Switch systems. SA Orig. Only Ring Ring Figure 47. MLX-20L and MLX-28D Telephone Button Diagram (Hybrid/PBX Mode)

  • Page 865: G Button Diagrams

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Button Diagrams Page G-2 Voice Ring Figure 48. MLX-16DP Telephone Button Diagram (Hybrid/PBX Mode) Voice Ring Figure 49. MLX 5- and 10-Button Telephone Button Diagram (Hybrid/PBX Mode)

  • Page 866: Analog Multiline Telephone Button Diagram (Hybrid/Pbx Mode

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Button Diagrams Page G-3 34 BUTTON 22 BUTTON 10 BUTTON 5 BUTTON Orig Only Voice Ring Figure 50. Analog Multiline Telephone Button Diagram (Hybrid/PBX Mode)

  • Page 867: Mlx-16Dp Telephone Button Diagram

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Button Diagrams Page G-4 Icom Voice Icom Ring Key Mode: Up to 8 personal line Behind Switch Mode: buttons are assigned One prime line button beginning at button 3. is assigned to button 3.
  • Page 868 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Button Diagrams Page G-5 Icom Voice Icom Ring Behind Switch Mode: One prime line is assigned to button 3 Figure 53. MLX 5- and 10-Button Telephone Button Diagram (Key and Behind Switch Modes)

  • Page 869: Analog Multiline Telephone Button Diagram (Key And Behind Switch Modes

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Button Diagrams Page G-6 34 BUTTON 22 BUTTON 10 BUTTON 5 BUTTON Icom Voice Icom Ring Behind Switch Mode: Key Mode: One prime line button Up to 8 Personal line is assigned to button 3.

  • Page 870: H Programming Special Characters

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Programming Special Characters Single-Line Telephones Page H-1 Programming Special Characters This appendix provides the special characters used in dialing sequences for numbers dialed automatically, such as on Auto Dial buttons. The characters allowed depend on the type of telephone.

  • Page 871: Analog Multiline Telephones

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Programming Special Characters Analog Multiline Telephones Page H-2 Analog Multiline Telephones Some dialing sequences need special characters. For example, the user presses Hold to insert a Pause character after the dial-out code in a dialing sequence to allow the system to seize an outside line before dialing the number.

  • Page 872: And Mlx-5 Nondisplay Telephones

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Programming Special Characters MLX-10 and MLX-5 Nondisplay Telephones Page H-3 MLX-10 and MLX-5 Nondisplay Telephones Some dialing sequences need special characters. For example, the user presses Hold to insert a Pause character after the dial-out code in a dialing sequence to allow the system to seize an outside line before dialing the number.

  • Page 873: Mlx Display Telephones

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Programming Special Characters MLX Display Telephones Page H-4 MLX Display Telephones Some dialing sequences need special characters. For example, the user presses Hold to insert a Pause character in a dialing sequence after a dial-out code to allow the system to seize an outside line before dialing the number.

  • Page 874: I Applications

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Applications Page I-1 Applications This appendix provides an overview of the applications that you can connect to the system or that were available in the past. For complete information about the use of any application discussed here, refer to the documentation for that product.
  • Page 875 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Applications Page I-2 Integrated applications — Messaging 2000  Automated Attendant  Voice/Fax Mail — Integrated Solution II (IS II) applications (see page I–43)  AUDIX Voice Power ...

  • Page 876: Organization Of Descriptions

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Applications Organization of Descriptions Page I-3 Data communications devices: — Ascend VSX Terminal Adapter NOTE: The ExpressRoute 1000 is no longer available for sale. The information included here is intended for existing installations and for technician reference.
  • Page 877 1 (2, 4, or 6 jacks)* Number of mailboxes MERLIN LEGEND Reporter Messaging 2000 Number of mailboxes 1000 Lucent Technologies Attendant CAS Plus V3/CAS for Windows Number of lines/trunks (each) Number of agents (each) Number of external alerts (each) SPM (standalone)

  • Page 878: Supported Printers

    Table 61. Applications Printers Printer Document No. Description Lucent Technologies 582-421-105 9-pin dot matrix printer that provides CAS Printer choice of print quality and speed. Uses parallel connection to the computer.

  • Page 879: Passageway Direct Connection Solution

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Applications PassageWay Direct Connection Solution Page I-6 PassageWay Direct Connection Solution IMPORTANT: This section is intended solely as an overview of the application. For comprehensive information about the use of the application, see the documentation for the product.
  • Page 880 Behind Switch mode) or an SA button (in Hybrid/PBX mode). Ensuring that Automatic Line Selection is set to an ICOM or an SA button means you can make both inside and outside calls via Lucent Technologies Call. (You make outside calls on an ICOM or SA button by dialing...

  • Page 881: Voice Messaging Systems

    Under applicable tariffs, you are responsible for payment of toll charges. Lucent Technologies cannot be responsible for such charges and will not make any allowance or give any credit resulting from unauthorized access.
  • Page 882 Voice Messaging Systems Page I-9 Messaging 2000 MERLIN LEGEND Enhanced Service Center Lucent Technologies Attendant (no longer available) AUDIX Voice Power (no longer available) Intuity AUDIX SECURITYlALERT: Beginning with Release 2.1, a 012 or 016 (T/R) port that is programmed as a generic VMI port can transfer an outside call to an outside number.
  • Page 883 VMI port that originated the transfer. For example, you might program Extension 15 as a VMI port for a Lucent Technologies Attendant and set the transfer redirect time interval to four rings. When a call comes in on Extension 15, the caller listens to a recording and dials a request for Extension 24.

  • Page 884: Merlin Mail And Merlin Legend Mail

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Applications MERLIN MAIL and MERLIN LEGEND Mail Page I-11 Ports In/Out of Service When a group call to a VMI extension is not answered within 30 seconds, the call either is sent to another available VMI extension in the calling group or is queued back to wait for an available extension in the calling group.
  • Page 885 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Applications MERLIN MAIL and MERLIN LEGEND Mail Page I-12 Automated Attendant Service Automated Attendant Service consists of one or more menus, providing callers with a number of options that allow them to quickly access an extension, a department, or information by pressing a single dialpad button.
  • Page 886 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Applications MERLIN MAIL and MERLIN LEGEND Mail Page I-13 Call Answer Service The system’s Call Answer Service allows callers to leave messages or to transfer to another extension when the extension called is busy or does not answer. When a message is left, Call Answer Service deposits the message in the subscriber’s voice mailbox, then lights the message-waiting indicator on the subscriber’s phone.
  • Page 887 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Applications MERLIN MAIL and MERLIN LEGEND Mail Page I-14 Collected Digits MERLIN LEGEND Mail is capable of collecting the caller’s input, which can then be used by PassageWay Telephony Services client applications. These applications are enabled by the system’s CTI Link feature, described in “CTI (Computer Telephony Integration) Link”...
  • Page 888 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Applications MERLIN MAIL and MERLIN LEGEND Mail Page I-15 Considerations and Constraints The MERLIN MAIL and MERLIN LEGEND Mail VMSs are available in 2-port, 4-port, and 6-port configurations. The 2-port and 4-port configurations have 6 hours of message storage capacity, and the 6-port configuration has 10 hours of message storage capacity.
  • Page 889 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Applications MERLIN MAIL and MERLIN LEGEND Mail Page I-16 Coverage In Release 2.0 and later, when subscribers activate Coverage VMS Off for continued their telephones, normally covered outside calls are not covered. No special programming is needed on MERLIN MAIL or MERLIN LEGEND Mail to activate this feature.
  • Page 890 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Applications MERLIN MAIL and MERLIN LEGEND Mail Page I-17 Transfer If a call received on a line/trunk is transferred to a VMI port, the direct inside access mode code is sent. The call is treated as a transferred call, and the caller hears the greeting assigned for callers within the system.
  • Page 891 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Applications MERLIN MAIL and MERLIN LEGEND Mail Page I-18 Platform Requirements MERLIN MAIL Voice Messaging System To connect the MERLIN MAIL VMS to the system, you need the following equipment: MERLIN MAIL VMS unit Remote maintenance device (a modem and power supply)

  • Page 892: Messaging 2000

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Applications Messaging 2000 Page I-19 NOTES: 1. The system treats the MERLIN LEGEND Mail module as a 012 module. It uses a maximum of seven ports, up to six VMI ports and one RMD port (port 7);...

  • Page 893: Lucent Technologies Attendant

    Lucent Technologies Attendant answers incoming calls and plays a menu of recorded prompts. A caller can respond to the prompts by dialing touch tones. The application then routes the call to an inside extension. Lucent Technologies Attendant transfers callers with rotary telephones to a designated extension...
  • Page 894 Applications Lucent Technologies Attendant Page I-21 You can program Lucent Technologies Attendant to transfer calls in either of two ways: Unsupervised Transfer. The application dials the extension or department requested by the caller and disconnects. If the call is not answered or the extension is busy, the communications system routes the call to the redirect extension.
  • Page 895 In Release 2.0 and later, outside calls that would normally proceed to Lucent Technologies Attendant as coverage calls do not do so if the telephone that sends the call to Group Coverage has activated Coverage VMS Off.

  • Page 896: Lucent Technologies Attendants Required

    Applications Lucent Technologies Attendant Page I-23 Platform Requirements To connect Lucent Technologies Attendant to the system, you need the following equipment: Lucent Technologies Attendant unit A 6-wire modular telephone cord A 012 module (and ring generator, if the module has the apparatus code 517F13).

  • Page 897: Merlin Legend Enhanced Service Center

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Applications MERLIN LEGEND Enhanced Service Center Page I-24 MERLIN LEGEND Enhanced Service Center Typically used in a customer service environment, the MERLIN LEGEND Enhanced Service Center (ESC) provides the automatic answering, distribution, and placing in queue of customer calls.

  • Page 898: Call Accounting System

    CAS for Windows. This version takes advantage of the easy-to-use graphical user interface of Microsoft Windows. It is also a standalone application that runs on a Lucent Technologies-approved DOS PC. It allows a single CAS system to be used for both local and remote business sites.
  • Page 899 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Applications Call Accounting System Page I-26 Station Identification automatic Number Identification (SID/ANI) service. However, the availability of this information may be limited, depending on the legal jurisdiction and the equipment at the CO serving the caller. IS CAS also includes custom rate tables, required for the application.
  • Page 900 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Applications Call Accounting System Page I-27 If your system is using MERLIN LEGEND Reporter, make sure that the SMDR Talk Time option is disabled. Run a report to verify that Caller ID information is being processed and reported in CAS according to your needs and requirements.

  • Page 901: Call Accounting Terminal

    Bus mouse For a single-site system, a 120-MB tape drive For a multi-site system, a 525-MB tape drive Lucent Technologies Applications printer For communications using CAS for Windows, the following components are recommended: For a single-site system, one parallel port and two built-in serial ports (DB9...

  • Page 902: Call Accounting Terminal Basic

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Applications Call Accounting Terminal Page I-29 You customize CAT with current local and long-distance rates for your company’s location. As rates change or a new area code or exchange is added, you can update the rate information by exchanging a chip inside the terminal.

  • Page 903: Call Accounting Terminal Plus

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Applications Call Accounting Terminal Page I-30 CAT can receive and process ANI information as well as Caller ID information provided by the incoming line identification from SMDR. The system gets such information from the AT&T Megacom 800 service, MCI or central office (DMS-100) PRI services (Release 4.2 and later systems only), or local telephone company loop-start line/trunk Caller ID services and puts it into the SMDR.
  • Page 904 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Applications Call Accounting Terminal Page I-31 Considerations and Constraints You can connect only one CAT to the system. CAT Basic can store information about as many as 1,200 calls for 100 extensions and 49 lines.

  • Page 905: Call Management System

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Applications Call Management System Page I-32 Call Management System IMPORTANT: This section is intended solely as an overview of the application, which is no longer available for sale. For comprehensive information about the use of the application, see the documentation for the product.
  • Page 906 Considerations and Constraints You can connect a maximum of two CMSs to the system. You must install CMS on a Lucent Technologies-approved DOS PC, which is dedicated to the application. You must connect the two CMS interface card ports on the PC to two analog multiline extension jacks on the same module in the control unit (008 or 408).
  • Page 907 ASCAP or BMI. Or you can purchase a Magic on Hold system, which does not require such a license, from Lucent Technologies. Call Management System does not work with Caller ID on loop-start lines. It does work with PRI or BRI service.

  • Page 908: Merlin Legend Reporter

    MERLIN LEGEND Reporter Page I-35 Platform Requirements To connect CMS to the system, you need the following equipment: A Lucent Technologies-approved DOS PC, with: — CMS interface card with two 14-ft. (430-cm), 4-pair modular extension cords — CMS software Digital Announcer Unit with one 14-ft. (430-cm) DIN connector cord...
  • Page 909 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Applications MERLIN LEGEND Reporter Page I-36 MERLIN LEGEND Reporter includes the following major features: Call Collection. MERLIN LEGEND Reporter collects call records from the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System’s SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording) feature.
  • Page 910 MERLIN LEGEND Reporter Page I-37 Remote Access. Optionally, you can install remote access software and a modem to allow remote assistance from the Lucent Technologies customer helpline. Multi-Site Network. MERLIN LEGEND Reporter can work in a network configuration where one central site receives SMDR information from multiple sites and multiple MERLIN LEGEND Communications System control units for central processing and reporting.
  • Page 911 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Applications MERLIN LEGEND Reporter Page I-38 Feature Interactions Account Code Entry If SMDR is set to record outgoing calls only, account codes cannot be reported on incoming calls. If a remote access barrier code is entered for an incoming call and then an account code is entered, the account code only (not the barrier code ID) is recorded.
  • Page 912 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Applications MERLIN LEGEND Reporter Page I-39 Group Calling Calls to calling groups are associated with the first extension to handle the call. If the call is answered by the calling group delay announcement device and the caller hangs up, the extension for the delay announcement device is recorded on the record.
  • Page 913 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Applications MERLIN LEGEND Reporter Page I-40 SMDR MERLIN LEGEND Reporter collects call information from the SMDR output of the system. To print system reports without interrupting the collection of SMDR information, use System Programming and Maintenance (SPM) software to print reports from a PC’s printer, not from the SMDR port.

  • Page 914: System Programming And Maintenance

    Two versions of SPM are available: SPM. This standalone version runs on a Lucent Technologies-approved DOS PC. Version 4.25, for Release 4.1 and later systems, runs as a DOS application under Windows 95.
  • Page 915 SMDR port. Platform Requirements To support standalone SPM, you need: Lucent Technologies-approved DOS PC MS-DOS 3.3 or higher; or for Release 4.1 or later, Windows 95 or later and a Windows 95-compatible version of DOS (SPM runs as a DOS application under Windows 95 in Release 4.1 and later systems)

  • Page 916: Integrated Solution Ii

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Applications Integrated Solution II Page I-43 A D8W modular cord and a 355AF modular adapter if the PC is less than 50 ft. (15 m) from the control unit. Distances of greater than 50 ft. (15 m) require back-to-back Asynchronous Data Units (ADUs).
  • Page 917 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Applications Integrated Solution II Page I-44 programmed interval, calls are automatically transferred to the system operator. In no-gate mode, callers hear the main menu immediately and, if no response is received after the main menu is played, calls are transferred to the system operator.

  • Page 918: Voice Channels Required: Is Ii

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Applications Integrated Solution II Page I-45 Table 65. Voice Channels Required: IS II Channels Required Lines Subscribers Busy-Hour Calls 1 to 6 1 to 20 1 to 20 7 to 18 21 to 60 21 to 60...
  • Page 919 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Applications Integrated Solution II Page I-46 Feature Interactions Account Code Entry CAS IS II associates account codes entered by users before or during calls with accounts and individuals; they appear on CAS IS II reports. Coverage An inside call on a VMI port that transfers to an inside extension does not go to coverage.

  • Page 920: Voice Messaging Systems I

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Applications Integrated Solution II Page I-47 Transfer Beginning with Release 2.1, any VMI port can transfer an incoming call to an outgoing line/trunk. In earlier versions, only integrated VMI ports could transfer to an outgoing line/trunk.
  • Page 921 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Applications Integrated Solution II Page I-48 When you use AVP Automated Attendant for Night Service only, do the following: — If the lines/trunks set for answering by Automated Attendant appear at other extensions, set the No Ring option for the other telephones.

  • Page 922: Integrated Solution Iii

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Applications Integrated Solution III Page I-49 Integrated Solution III IMPORTANT: This section is intended solely as an overview of the application, which is no longer available for sale. For comprehensive information about the use of the application, see the documentation for the product.
  • Page 923 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Applications Integrated Solution III Page I-50 SECURITYlALERT: To restrict outcalling, use AVP’s Transfer to Subscribers Only feature. Do not use MERLIN LEGEND Communications System calling restrictions. Fax Attendant 2.1.1. Provides an integrated voice/fax mailbox, fax broadcasting, fax bulletin board, and coverage for busy or off-line fax machines.
  • Page 924 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Applications Integrated Solution III Page I-51 — ANI and Caller ID Support. IS CAS collects and processes Automatic Number Identification (ANI) information as well as Caller ID information provided through the 800 GS/LS-ID module.
  • Page 925 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Applications Integrated Solution III Page I-52 You cannot install Automated Attendant as a standalone application but only in conjunction with AUDIX Voice Power. When an AUDIX Voice Power subscriber receives a voice mail message, the Message LED on the telephone lights.
  • Page 926 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Applications Integrated Solution III Page I-53 Leave Message If a Leave Message notification is left in a mailbox in a system with heavy VMI traffic, the subscriber may have to dial out manually to retrieve the message.
  • Page 927 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Applications Integrated Solution III Page I-54 AUDIX Voice Power with Automated Attendant requires the following system programming: Set inside dial tone to Outside. Assign Automated Attendants to a calling group and specify the group type as VMI Integrated.
  • Page 928 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Applications Integrated Solution III Page I-55 extension numbers are sufficient for private fax extensions because outside calls placed to a DID number ring the fax machine or phantom extension.

  • Page 929: Voice Channels Required: Is Iii

    When IS III is delivered, it is installed and configured according to the applications you ordered. The system consists of a MAP/5 running UNIX System V Release 3.2.2. Various hardware configurations are available; see the Lucent Technologies Integrated Solution III Installation and Maintenance Guide for details.

  • Page 930: Intuity

    Intuity platform. For comprehensive information about the use of the applications, see the documentation for the products. Intuity is Lucent Technologies’ messaging solution. It provides a single, integrated interface to any of the following applications (your package may not include all of these): AUDIX Voice Messaging.

  • Page 931: Group Iv Fax

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Applications Group IV Fax Page I-58 Group IV Fax NOTE: Through its support of high-speed digital facilities, the system allows you to use several types of advanced data communications application, including Group IV fax, videoconferencing, and rapid data transfer.

  • Page 932: Merlin Pfc Telephone

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Applications MERLIN PFC Telephone Page I-59 MERLIN PFC Telephone IMPORTANT: This section is intended solely as an overview of the application. For comprehensive information about the use of the application, see the documentation for the product.
  • Page 933 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Applications MERLIN PFC Telephone Page I-60 5-Page Automatic Document Feeder 16-Character Display 4 Fixed Buttons Programmable Buttons Status Indicator Lights Speakerphone HFAI Automatic Paper Cutter Figure 57. MERLIN PFC Telephone The system must have two analog extension jacks available on the control unit.
  • Page 934 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Applications MERLIN PFC Telephone Page I-61 You cannot assign lines and line pools to the fax extension. At the fax extension you should program the dedicated fax line to Immediate Ring and any other lines to No Ring.

  • Page 935: Intuity Conversant

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Applications Intuity CONVERSANT Page I-62 Intuity CONVERSANT IMPORTANT: This section is intended solely as an overview of the application. For comprehensive information about the use of the application, see the documentation for the product.

  • Page 936: Picasso Still-Image Phone

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Applications Picasso Still-Image Phone Page I-63 Logging and displaying error messages Management reports and a system monitor for monitoring daily and ongoing system progress Considerations and Constraints Intuity CONVERSANT supports a maximum of 24 channels of analog ports, or up to 6 IVP4 boards.
  • Page 937 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Applications Picasso Still-Image Phone Page I-64 Optional real-time annotation using a Windows-compatible annotation device such as a mouse Windows interface software Support for required customer-supplied input device Support for required customer-supplied monitor Considerations and Constraints Image transmission requires 5 to 40 seconds.

  • Page 938: Videoconferencing

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Applications Videoconferencing Page I-65 Videoconferencing NOTE: Through its support of high-speed digital facilities, the system allows you to use several types of advanced data communications applications, including Group IV fax, videoconferencing, and rapid data transfer. For more information about digital facilities and adjuncts, see the following topics: “Basic Rate Interface (BRI)”...
  • Page 939 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Applications Videoconferencing Page I-66 NOTE: For the most complete information about videoconferencing, see the Data/Video Reference. In this guide, “Digital Data Calls” on page 200 includes details about how the system functions with 2B data. Videoconferencing requires PRI, BRI, or T1 Switched 56 digital services for communications at 56 or 64 kbps (kilobits per second) per channel or B-channel.
  • Page 940 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Applications Videoconferencing Page I-67 Group video systems are often integrated in a mobile roll-about console that can be wheeled easily into a conference room or executive office prior to a scheduled videoconference call.
  • Page 941 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Applications Videoconferencing Page I-68 Outside Video Only. Use Idle Line Access to dial the telephone number; repeat this step for the second call. To call the telephone at a passive-bus desktop videoconferencing workstation, dial the extension number for the telephone.
  • Page 942 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Applications Videoconferencing Page I-69 To disconnect from a video call, follow the instructions provided with your videoconferencing equipment. Considerations and Constraints Generally, video workstations should have exclusive use of their own lines and dedicated pools (Hybrid/PBX mode only).
  • Page 943 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Applications Videoconferencing Page I-70 Automatic Route Video calls can be made using ARS. To make calls using ARS, video Selection systems simply dial the ARS dial-out code (usually ) followed by the telephone number.
  • Page 944 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Applications Videoconferencing Page I-71 Messaging Messaging features are not available for video extensions. Multi-Function An MFM cannot be used with a digital communications device or Module videoconferencing system. Night Service If a videoconferencing system is a member of the Night Service group, voice calls to Night Service group do not ring at these extensions.
  • Page 945 For digital data communications, the system operates with the following central office switches, according to the access arrangement or facility: — PRI. Requires Lucent Technologies 4ESS Generic 16 and later; or Lucent Technologies 5ESS Generic 6 and later; or Lucent Technologies 5ESS serving the FTS-2000 network.

  • Page 946: Expressroute 1000

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Applications ExpressRoute 1000 Page I-73 Network services for high-speed data transmission are available from AT&T, MCI (Release 4.2 and later systems), and your local service provider (Release 4.2 and later systems). For details, see “Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1”...
  • Page 947 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Applications ExpressRoute 1000 Page I-74 The ExpressRoute 1000 supports data calls over Primary Rate Interface B-channels (at 64 kbps), Basic Rate Interface B-channels (at 64 kbps), and T1 Switched 56 lines (at 56 kbps).

  • Page 948: Ascend Pipeline 25Px/75Px

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Applications Ascend Pipeline 25Px/75Px Page I-75 Ringing Options Personalized Ringing has no effect on calls to an ExpressRoute 1000. ExpressRoute 1000s follow programmed ringing options and should be set to Immediate Ring.
  • Page 949 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Applications Ascend Pipeline 25Px/75Px Page I-76 to dynamically assign an IP address to the device. Because of this capability, the Pipeline 25Px/75Px can be used for standard consumer Internet access accounts, which are considerably less expensive than business or local area network (LAN) accounts.
  • Page 950 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Applications Ascend Pipeline 25Px/75Px Page I-77 Feature Interactions Data hunt groups are not practical where 2B data is required, because two calls must arrive at the destination video system, and data hunt groups distribute the two calls that make up a 2B data call to two different data hunt group members.
  • Page 951 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Applications Ascend Pipeline 25Px/75Px Page I-78 Night Service If a digital communications device is a member of the Night Service group, voice calls to Night Service group do not ring at these extensions. Data or video calls do ring, and 2B data calls can be established.
  • Page 952 — PRI. Requires Lucent Technologies 4ESS Generic 16 and later; or Lucent Technologies 5ESS Generic 6 and later; or Lucent Technologies 5ESS serving the FTS-2000 network. In Release 5.0 and later systems,...
  • Page 953 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Applications Ascend Pipeline 25Px/75Px Page I-80 In addition to the operating system software, TCP/IP and Internet tool software (for example, a browser and email application) must be installed on the PC. The user must have an account with an Internet service provider (ISP), who should provide the following information to the user: Domain name server (DNS)

  • Page 954: Glossary

    MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Glossary Page GL-1 Glossary Italics The use of italics in the glossary denotes multiple usage of the italicized text throughout the glossary. Numerics Digital information carried by two B-channels for better 2B data performance and quality;...
  • Page 955 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Glossary Page GL-2 (alternate mark inversion) Line coding format in which a binary one is represented by a positive or negative pulse, a binary zero is represented by no line signal, and subsequent binary ones must alternate in polarity;...
  • Page 956 Message Drop, Voice Mail, and, optionally, Fax Attendant System for use with the system. Automated IS II/III , MERLIN LEGEND Mail , and Lucent Technologies Attendant Attendant application that automatically answers incoming calls with a recorded announcement and directs callers to a department, an extension, or the system operator.
  • Page 957 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Glossary Page GL-4 Password used to limit access to the Remote Access barrier code feature of the system. In a private network , it is especially important that barrier codes be required for all types of remote access.
  • Page 958 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Glossary Page GL-5 board A module, for example, 100D or 408 MLX GS/LS, that allows you to connect lines/trunks and extensions to the communications system. board assignment System Programming and Maintenance (SPM) procedure for assigning line/trunk and extension modules to slots on the control unit.
  • Page 959 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Glossary Page GL-6 CCITT (International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee) (common-channel signaling) Signaling in which one channel of a group of channels carries signaling information for each of the remaining channels, permitting each of the remaining channels to be used to nearly full capacity.
  • Page 960 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Glossary Page GL-7 clock When digital signals are transmitted over a synchronization communications link, the receiving end must be synchronized with the transmitting end to receive the digital signals without errors using clock synchronization.
  • Page 961 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Glossary Page GL-8 Processor module , power supply module , other modules , control unit carriers , and housing of the system. console Telephone and adjuncts (if any) at operator or system programmer extension.
  • Page 962 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Glossary Page GL-9 See DCE . data communications equipment data module A type of ISDN terminal adapter that acts as the DCE at a data workstation that communicates over high-speed digital facilities.
  • Page 963 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Glossary Page GL-10 See DNIS . Dialed Number Identification Service dial-out code Digit (usually a ) or digits dialed by telephone users to get an outside line. dial plan Numbering scheme for system extensions, lines, and trunks.
  • Page 964 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Glossary Page GL-11 display buttons Buttons on an MLX display telephone used to access the telephone’s display. (Direct-Line Console) Telephone used by a system operator to answer outside calls (not directed to an individual or a group) and inside calls, transfer calls, make outside calls for users with outward calling restrictions, set up conference calls, and monitor system operation.
  • Page 965 (193 bits) in a 24-frame extended superframe. (Electronic Switching System) Class of central office ( CO ) switching systems developed by Lucent Technologies in which the control functions are performed principally by electronic data processors operating under the direction of a stored program.
  • Page 966 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Glossary Page GL-13 extension Programming performed at an extension to customize programming telephones for personal needs; users can program features on buttons, set the telephone ringing pattern, and so on. See also centralized telephone programming and system programming .
  • Page 967 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Glossary Page GL-14 frame One of several segments of an analog or digital signal that has a repetitive characteristic. For example, a DS1 frame consists of a framing bit and 24 bytes, which equals 193 bits.
  • Page 968 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Glossary Page GL-15 HFAI (Hands-Free Answer on Intercom) Feature that allows a user to answer a voice-announced call. (Hands-Free Unit) Unit for analog multiline telephones that allows users to make and receive calls on the speakerphone without using the handset.
  • Page 969 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Glossary Page GL-16 See ICOM buttons. intercom buttons interface Hardware and/or software that links systems, programs, or devices. intersystem calls In a private network , calls between a local extension and a local or non-local dial plan extension.
  • Page 970 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Glossary Page GL-17 kbps (kilobits per second) Key mode One of three modes of system operation, in which the system uses personal lines on line buttons for outside calls, with a separate interface ( ICOM buttons ) for inside calling.
  • Page 971 This application is no longer available. Magic on Hold A Lucent Technologies Music On Hold enhancement that promotes a company’s products or services. Mbps (megabits per second) The AT&T tariffed digital WATS offering for outward calling.
  • Page 972 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Glossary Page GL-19 MLX telephone A multiline button telephone that transmits and receives digital signals . mode codes Streams of touch-tone codes used by voice messaging applications to communicate with the system’s control unit. modem Device that converts digital data signals to analog signals for transmission over a telephone line, and analog signals...
  • Page 973 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Glossary Page GL-20 Music On Hold Customer-provided music source or Magic on Hold connected to the system through a loop-start jack. network Configuration of communications devices and software connected for information interchange.
  • Page 974 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Glossary Page GL-21 (off-premises telephone) Single-line telephone or other tip/ring device connected to the system via a 008 OPT module in the control unit. Appears as an inside extension to the system, but may be physically located away from the system.
  • Page 975 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Glossary Page GL-22 See jack . Also, refers to extension or line/trunk jacks before port these are numbered according to the dial plan during programming. The lowest jack on a module is always Port 1.
  • Page 976 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Glossary Page GL-23 (Queued Call Console) MLX-20L telephone used by a system operator in Hybrid/PBX mode only. Used to answer outside calls (directed to a system operator position) and inside calls, direct inside and outside calls to an extension or an outside telephone number, serve as a message center, make outside calls for users with outward calling...
  • Page 977 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Glossary Page GL-24 (Supplemental Alert Adapter) Device that permits alerting equipment to be connected to an analog multiline telephone jack so that people working in noisy or remote areas of a building can be alerted to incoming calls.
  • Page 978 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Glossary Page GL-25 (System Programming and Maintenance) DOS -, UNIX-, or Windows-based application for programming the system. square key Configuration in Key mode operation in which all outside lines appear on all telephones.
  • Page 979 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Glossary Page GL-26 See SPM . System Programming and Maintenance system Procedure used to change the numbers assigned to renumbering telephones, adjuncts, calling group s, paging groups, park zones, Remote Access , and lines/trunks.
  • Page 980 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Glossary Page GL-27 Contacts and associated conductors of a single-line tip/ring telephone plug or jack. touch-tone See TTR . receiver See tip/ring . trunk Telecommunications path between the communications system and the telephone company central office ( CO ) or another switch.
  • Page 981 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Glossary Page GL-28 unrestricted data Unrestricted data channels (also called clear data channel channels) allow the transmission of occurrences of more than seven contiguous zero bits. If an unrestricted data channel is requested and only restricted channels are available, the call will be rejected.
  • Page 982 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Index Page IN-1 Index Numerics 008 OPT modules 012 T/R modules touch-tone receivers (TTRs) 016 T/R modules touch-tone receivers (TTRs) 1 + 7 Tables 2B data 2-digit numbering plan 2-digit numbering plan, see also System Renumbering 3-digit numbering plan 3-digit numbering plan, see also System Renumbering...
  • Page 983 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Index Page IN-2 Alarm Clock, feature interactions Display language choice Alarm, feature interactions Automatic Maintenance Busy Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) link Direct-Line Console (DLC) Inspect Night Service personal lines Pools Queued Call Console (QCC)
  • Page 984 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Index Page IN-3 Authorization Code, feature interactions, (continued) Night Service Park Queued Call Console (QCC) Remote Access Saved Number Dial Speed Dial Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) System Renumbering Transfer Auto Answer All...
  • Page 985 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Index Page IN-4 Auto Login/Logout, see Group Calling Automated Attendant Service, see Integrated Administration, Appendix I, Lucent Technologies Atten- dant Automatic Callback Automatic Callback, see also Callback Automatic Completion, see Transfer Automatic Hold or Release, see Queued Call Console (QCC)
  • Page 986 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Index Page IN-5 Barge-In Barge-In, feature interactions Basic Rate Interface (BRI) Callback Conference Coverage digital data calls Direct Station Selector (DSS) Display Do Not Disturb Forward and Follow Me Group Calling Headset options HotLine...
  • Page 987 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Index Page IN-6 Call Waiting Call Waiting, feature interactions Basic Rate Interface (BRI) Callback Camp-On Conference Coverage digital data calls Direct-Line Console (DLC) Display Forward and Follow Me Group Calling Hold HotLine...
  • Page 988 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Index Page IN-7 Callback, feature interactions, (continued) tandem switching Transfer UDP features Call-by-Call Service Selection Call-by-Call Services Table, see Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 Called Party Number (CdPN) Caller ID across a private network Caller ID, feature interactions...
  • Page 989 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Index Page IN-8 Camp-On, feature interactions Call Waiting Coverage digital data calls Direct Station Selector (DSS) Direct-Line Console (DLC) Display Do Not Disturb Forward and Follow Me Group Calling Line Request Music On Hold...
  • Page 990 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Index Page IN-9 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) link, feature interactions Alarm Conference Coverage digital data calls Direct-Line Console (DLC) Directories Display Forward and Follow Me Group Calling Hold personal lines Pools...
  • Page 991 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Index Page IN-10 Consultation, see Transfer, Conference CONVERSANT CONVERSANT, see also Appendix I Coverage across a private network to a QCC across a private network Coverage delay options Coverage, feature interactions Account Code Entry/Forced Account Code Entry Auto Answer All...
  • Page 992 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Index Page IN-11 DEFINITY Enterprise Communications Server (ECS) and DEFINITY ProLogix Solutions non-local Uniform Dial Plan (UDP) Delay Announcement, see Group Calling Delay Ring, see Ringing Options DFT (Direct Facility Termination), see Personal lines Dial 0 Table Dial by name, see Directories...
  • Page 993 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Index Page IN-12 Direct Station Selector (DSS), feature interactions Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Barge-In Camp-On Coverage Direct Voice Mail Display Do Not Disturb Extension Status Forward and Follow Me Group Calling Hold Inspect...
  • Page 994 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Index Page IN-13 Direct-Line Console (DLC), feature interactions, (continued) Speed Dial System Access/Intercom buttons Transfer UDP features Directories description Extension Personal security System Directories, feature interactions Account Code Entry/Forced Account Code Entry Allowed/Disallowed Lists Automatic Route Selection (ARS) calling restrictions...
  • Page 995 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Index Page IN-14 Display, feature interactions, (continued) Forward Forward and Follow Me Group Calling Hold Inspect Last Number Dial Messaging Night Service Paging Park Pickup Pools Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 Privacy Programming Queued Call Console (QCC)
  • Page 996 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Index Page IN-15 Drop, see also Conference Drop-and-insert equipment xxvi DS1, see Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and T1 non-local extensions DSS, see Direct Station Selector (DSS) Enhanced Service Center Enhanced Service Center, see MERLIN LEGEND Enhanced Service Center.
  • Page 997 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Index Page IN-16 Federal Communications Commission (FCC), see Appendix A Flexible numbering, see System Renumbering Follow Me, see Forward and Follow Me Forced Account Code Entry, see Account Code Entry/Forced Account Code Entry Forward and Follow Me Forward and Follow Me, feature interactions Account Code Entry/Forced Account Code Entry...
  • Page 998 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Index Page IN-17 Group Calling Calls-In-Queue Alarm Threshold delay announcement description message-waiting receiver non-local member overflow receivers overflow threshold reports about supervisor position Group calling prompt-based overflow queue control Group Calling, feature interactions Auto Answer All...
  • Page 999 Park Privacy Queued Call Console (QCC) Ringing Options Ringing/Idle Line Preference Transfer Headset/Handset Mute Helpline, Lucent Technologies, see Appendix A HFAI, see Hands-Free Answer on Intercom (HFAI), Auto Answer Intercom Hold description Disconnect Interval setting DLC Operator Automatic setting one-touch...
  • Page 1000 MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 6.1 Issue 1 Feature Reference 555-661-110 August 1998 Index Page IN-19 Hold, feature interactions, (continued) Conference Coverage digital data calls Direct Station Selector (DSS) Direct-Line Console (DLC) Directories Display Fax Extension Group Calling Headset options HotLine Inspect Multi-Function Module (MFM)

This manual is also suitable for:

Merlin legend

Table of Contents